HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, And M603 Series Printer Service Manual ENWW M600
User Manual: HP Laserjet M600 shared.swissparts.ch - /Manuals/HP/LaserJet/Mono Laserjet/
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 572
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
LASERJET ENTERPRISE 600 M601, M602, AND M603 SERIES PRINTER Service Manual HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer Service Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits © 2011 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Part number: CE988-90945 Edition 1, 11/2011 Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product. ENWW iii iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW Table of contents 1 Theory of operation .......................................................................................................... 1 Basic operation ........................................................................................................................ 2 Major print systems ................................................................................................... 2 Internal components .................................................................................................. 3 Operating sequence .................................................................................................. 7 Formatter system ...................................................................................................................... 8 Sleep mode .............................................................................................................. 8 Input/output ............................................................................................................. 8 USB .......................................................................................................... 8 Embedded print server ................................................................................ 9 Hard-disk .................................................................................................. 9 CPU ......................................................................................................... 9 Memory ................................................................................................................... 9 Random-access memory .............................................................................. 9 Nonvolatile memory ................................................................................... 9 DIMM slot ................................................................................................................ 9 PJL overview ........................................................................................................... 10 PML ....................................................................................................................... 10 Control panel ......................................................................................................... 10 Engine-control system .............................................................................................................. 11 DC controller PCA ................................................................................................... 12 Sensors, solenoids, and switches ............................................................................... 13 Motors and fans ...................................................................................................... 14 Failure detection ...................................................................................... 14 Motor failure ............................................................................ 14 Fan motor failure ....................................................................... 14 Engine power supply ................................................................................ 15 Fuser-control circuit .................................................................... 15 Low-voltage power supply .......................................................... 17 High-voltage power supply ......................................................... 18 Overcurrent/overvoltage protection ............................................. 19 Image-formation system ........................................................................................................... 20 ENWW v Image-formation process .......................................................................................... 21 Block 1: Latent image formation ................................................................. 23 Step 1: Primary charging ........................................................... 23 Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ...................................................... 23 Block 2: Developing ................................................................................. 24 Step 3: Developing .................................................................... 24 Block 3: Transfer ...................................................................................... 25 Step 4: Transfer ........................................................................ 25 Step 5: Separation .................................................................... 25 Block 4: Fusing ........................................................................................ 26 Step 6: Fusing ........................................................................... 26 Block 5: Drum cleaning ............................................................................. 27 Step 7: Drum cleaning ............................................................... 27 Step 8: Drum charge elimination ................................................. 27 Laser/scanner system ............................................................................................................. 28 Laser failure detection .............................................................................................. 30 Pickup, feed, and delivery system ............................................................................................. 31 Pickup-and-feed block .............................................................................................. 32 Fuser/delivery block ................................................................................................ 33 Pressure roller pressure release control ....................................................................... 33 Paper trays ............................................................................................................. 34 Printing from Tray 1 .................................................................................. 34 Printing from Tray 2 .................................................................................. 34 Cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection ...................... 34 Jam detection ......................................................................................................... 36 1x500-sheet paper feeder ....................................................................................................... 40 Pickup-and-feed operation (PF) .................................................................................. 41 Cassette lift operation (PF) ........................................................................................ 43 Cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection (PF) ............................... 43 Cassette multiple-feed prevention (PF) ........................................................................ 43 Jam detection (PF) ................................................................................................... 43 1x1500-sheet paper deck ....................................................................................................... 44 Pickup-and-feed operation (PD) ................................................................................. 45 Cassette lift operation (PD) ....................................................................................... 47 Media size detection (PD) ........................................................................................ 48 Multiple-feed prevention (PD) .................................................................................... 48 Jam detection (PF) ................................................................................................... 48 Envelope feeder ..................................................................................................................... 49 Pickup-and-feed operation (EF) .................................................................................. 50 Multiple-feed prevention (EF) ..................................................................................... 50 Multiple-feed detection (EF) ....................................................................................... 51 vi ENWW Jam detection (EF) ................................................................................................... 51 Duplexer ............................................................................................................................... 53 Motor and fan control (DP) ....................................................................................... 54 Failure detection (DP) ................................................................................ 55 Reverse-and-re-pickup operation (DP) ......................................................................... 55 Side registration adjustment operation (DP) ................................................................ 56 Jam detection (DP) ................................................................................................... 58 2 Removal and replacement .............................................................................................. 59 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 60 Removal and replacement strategy ........................................................................................... 60 Electrostatic discharge ............................................................................................................ 60 Required tools ........................................................................................................................ 61 Types of screws ..................................................................................................................... 62 Service approach ................................................................................................................... 63 Before performing service ........................................................................................ 63 After performing service ........................................................................................... 63 Post-service test ....................................................................................................... 63 Print-quality test ........................................................................................ 63 Customer replaceable units (CRUs) ........................................................................................... 64 Print cartridge ......................................................................................................... 64 Tray 2 ................................................................................................................... 65 Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers ................................................................ 66 Transfer roller ........................................................................................................ 69 Fuser ..................................................................................................................... 70 Remove the fuser ...................................................................................... 70 Formatter cover and formatter cage ........................................................................... 71 Installing a new formatter .......................................................................... 73 Hard drive ............................................................................................................. 74 Remove the SSM ...................................................................................... 74 Remove the encrypted HHD ....................................................................... 76 Installing a replacement hard drive ............................................................. 78 SSM firmware upgrade .............................................................. 78 HDD firmware upgrade .............................................................. 79 Memory DIMM ....................................................................................................... 80 Remove the memory DIMM ....................................................................... 80 Install the memory DIMM ........................................................................... 81 Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers .................................................................................. 82 Tray 1 separation roller ........................................................................................... 85 Rear output bin ....................................................................................................... 87 Covers .................................................................................................................................. 88 ENWW vii Top-accessory cover ................................................................................................ 88 Envelope feed accessory covers ................................................................................ 89 Duplex accessory or cover ....................................................................................... 90 Tray 2 extension door .............................................................................................. 91 Remove the Tray 2 extension door .............................................................. 91 Top cover ............................................................................................................... 92 Remove the top cover ............................................................................... 92 Right-side cover ....................................................................................................... 95 Remove the right-side cover ....................................................................... 95 Reinstall the right cover ............................................................................. 97 Left-side cover ......................................................................................................... 98 Remove the left-side cover ......................................................................... 98 Right-front cover .................................................................................................... 100 Remove the right-front cover ..................................................................... 100 Rear-upper cover ................................................................................................... 103 Remove the rear-upper cover ................................................................... 103 Front cover ........................................................................................................... 105 Remove the front cover ............................................................................ 105 Main assemblies .................................................................................................................. 107 Registration assembly ............................................................................................ 107 Control-panel assembly .......................................................................................... 109 Remove the control-panel assembly ........................................................... 109 Walk-up USB port and cable .................................................................................. 111 Remove the walk-up USB port and cable ................................................... 111 Inner connecting PCA ............................................................................................ 114 Remove the inner connecting PCA ............................................................ 114 Reinstall the inner connecting PCA ........................................................... 116 Fan FN102 .......................................................................................................... 117 Remove fan FN102 ................................................................................ 117 Fan FN103 .......................................................................................................... 119 Remove fan FN103 ................................................................................ 119 Pickup-motor assembly (M101) ............................................................................... 121 Remove the pickup-motor assembly ........................................................... 121 Drum-motor assembly (M102) ................................................................................. 123 Remove the drum motor .......................................................................... 123 Lifter-motor assembly (M103) .................................................................................. 125 Remove the lifter motor ........................................................................... 125 DC controller PCA ................................................................................................. 128 Remove the DC controller PCA ................................................................. 128 Reinstallation tip ..................................................................................... 129 Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller .................................... 129 viii ENWW Pickup-drive assembly ............................................................................................ 131 Remove the pickup-drive assembly ............................................................ 131 Reinstall the pickup-drive assembly ........................................................... 136 Fuser-motor assembly (M299) ................................................................................. 137 Remove the fuser-motor assembly ............................................................. 137 Drum-drive assembly .............................................................................................. 139 Remove the drum-drive assembly .............................................................. 139 Reinstall the drum-drive assembly ............................................................. 141 Fan FN101 .......................................................................................................... 142 Remove fan FN101 ................................................................................ 142 Fan FN301 .......................................................................................................... 144 Remove fan FN301 ................................................................................ 144 Environmental sensor (TH3) .................................................................................... 146 Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) .................................................... 146 High voltage power supply .................................................................................... 148 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly ........................................ 148 Feed-guide assembly ............................................................................................. 152 Remove the feed-guide assembly .............................................................. 152 Reinstall the feed-guide assembly ............................................................. 154 Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly ................................................................................ 155 Remove the Tray 1 pickup assembly ......................................................... 155 Feed-roller assembly .............................................................................................. 157 Remove the feed-roller assembly ............................................................... 157 Laser/scanner assembly ......................................................................................... 158 Remove the laser/scanner assembly ......................................................... 158 Paper-delivery assembly ........................................................................................ 161 Remove the paper-delivery assembly ......................................................... 161 Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly ........................................................ 164 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) ................................................................................................. 165 Separation roller (PD) ............................................................................................ 165 Rear cover (PD) ..................................................................................................... 167 Right-side cover (PD) .............................................................................................. 168 1,500-sheet paper deck left-side cover ..................................................................... 169 Remove the left-side cover ....................................................................... 169 Door (PD) ............................................................................................................. 172 Motor (PD) ........................................................................................................... 174 Remove the Motor (PD) ........................................................................... 174 Driver PCA (PD) .................................................................................................... 176 Remove the Driver PCA (PD) .................................................................... 176 Lift-drive assembly (PD) ........................................................................................... 178 Remove the Lift-drive assembly (PD) ........................................................... 178 ENWW ix 3 Solve problems ............................................................................................................. 181 Solve problems checklist ....................................................................................................... 182 Menu map .......................................................................................................................... 184 Preboot menu options ........................................................................................................... 185 Current settings pages .......................................................................................................... 192 Troubleshooting process ........................................................................................................ 193 Determine the problem source ................................................................................. 193 Pre-troubleshooting checklist .................................................................... 193 Troubleshooting flowchart ....................................................................... 194 Power subsystem ................................................................................................... 196 Power-on checks .................................................................................... 196 Overview ............................................................................... 196 Tools for troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 199 Component diagnostics .......................................................................................... 199 LED diagnostics ...................................................................................... 199 Understand lights on the formatter ............................................. 199 Engine diagnostics ................................................................................. 204 Engine test button .................................................................... 204 Formatter test .......................................................................... 204 Print/Stop test ......................................................................... 205 Drum rotation test .................................................................... 205 Paper-path test (and automatic sensor test) ................................................. 206 Paper path sensors test (automatic) ............................................ 206 Manual sensor test ................................................................................. 208 Top of page sensor (PS103) ..................................................... 210 Pre-feed sensor (PS102) ........................................................... 211 Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) ................................................... 212 Duplex sensor (PS1502) ........................................................... 213 Media width sensors 1/2 (PS106/108) ..................................... 214 Output bin full sensor (PS104) .................................................. 215 Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) ......................................... 216 Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) ......................................... 217 Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) ............................................ 218 Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) ......................................... 219 Tray/Bin manual sensor test .................................................................... 220 Print/stop test ........................................................................................ 220 Component tests ..................................................................................... 221 Diagrams ............................................................................................................. 223 Block diagrams ...................................................................................... 223 Main assemblies ..................................................................... 223 Main parts ............................................................................. 224 x ENWW Motors and fans ...................................................................... 225 PCAs ..................................................................................... 226 500-sheet feeder ..................................................................... 226 1,500-sheet feeder .................................................................. 227 Connectors ............................................................................................ 229 DC controller PCA connectors ................................................... 229 Product base connectors ........................................................... 231 500-sheet paper tray connectors ............................................... 232 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors ............................................ 232 Duplexer connectors ................................................................ 233 Envelope feeder connectors ...................................................... 233 General timing chart ............................................................................... 234 Circuit diagrams .................................................................................... 235 Internal print-quality test pages ................................................................................ 241 Print-quality-troubleshooting pages ............................................................ 241 Clean the paper path ............................................................................. 242 Set up an auto cleaning page ................................................... 242 Print configuration page .......................................................................... 243 Configuration page ................................................................. 243 HP embedded Jetdirect page .................................................... 245 Print quality troubleshooting tools ............................................................................ 246 Repetitive image defect ruler .................................................................... 246 Control-panel menus .............................................................................................. 247 Retrieve Job from USB menu .................................................................... 247 Retrieve Job from Device Memory menu .................................................... 247 Supplies menu ....................................................................................... 248 Trays menu ............................................................................................ 249 Administration menu ............................................................................... 250 Reports menu .......................................................................... 250 General Settings menu ............................................................. 250 Retrieve From USB Settings menu .............................................. 253 General Print Settings menu ...................................................... 253 Default Print Options menu ....................................................... 255 Display Settings menu .............................................................. 255 Manage Supplies menu ........................................................... 256 Manage Trays menu ................................................................ 257 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu .................................................. 258 Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu ................................................ 258 Network Settings menu ............................................................ 259 Troubleshooting menu .............................................................. 263 Device Maintenance menu ...................................................................... 264 ENWW xi Backup/Restore menu .............................................................. 264 Calibrate/Cleaning menu ........................................................ 264 USB Firmware Upgrade menu ................................................... 265 Service menu .......................................................................... 265 Interpret control-panel messages, status-alert messages, and event code errors .............. 266 10.00.33 .............................................................................................. 266 10.00.35 .............................................................................................. 266 10.00.60 .............................................................................................. 266 10.00.69 .............................................................................................. 267 10.00.91 .............................................................................................. 267 10.0X.Y0 Supply memory error ............................................................... 267 10.23.35 .............................................................................................. 268 10.23.50 .............................................................................................. 268 10.23.51 .............................................................................................. 268 10.23.52 .............................................................................................. 268 10.23.60 .............................................................................................. 268 10.23.70 Printing Past Very Low .............................................................. 269 10.26.15 .............................................................................................. 269 10.26.50 .............................................................................................. 269 10.26.60 .............................................................................................. 270 10.XX.34 Used Supply In Use .................................................................. 270 10.XX.40 Genuine HP Supplies Installed ................................................... 270 10.XX.41 Unsupported Supply In Use ....................................................... 271 10.XX.70 Printing past very low ............................................................... 271 10.YY.15 Install....................................................................... 271 10.YY.35 Incompatible ............................................................. 272 11.00.YY Internal clock error .................................................................. 272 13.00.00 .............................................................................................. 272 13.00.EE .............................................................................................. 273 13.A3.FF .............................................................................................. 273 13.D3.DZ ............................................................................................. 273 13.E5.FF ............................................................................................... 273 13.EA.EE .............................................................................................. 274 13.EE.FF ............................................................................................... 274 13.FF.EE ............................................................................................... 274 13.FF.FF ............................................................................................... 274 13.WX.EE ............................................................................................. 274 13.WX.FF ............................................................................................. 275 13.WX.YZ Fuser Area Jam ...................................................................... 275 13.WX.YZ Fuser wrap jam ...................................................................... 275 13.WX.YZ Jam below control panel ......................................................... 275 xii ENWW 13.WX.YZ Jam in Tray 1 ........................................................................ 275 13.WX.YZ Jam in Tray ..................................................................... 276 13.WX.YZ Jam inside envelope feeder ..................................................... 276 13.WX.YZ Jam inside top cover ............................................................... 276 14.00.XX .............................................................................................. 276 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: To continue, touch “OK” ............... 277 21.00.00 Page Too Complex .................................................................. 277 32.08.AX .............................................................................................. 277 32.1C.XX .............................................................................................. 278 32.21.00 .............................................................................................. 284 33.01.XX .............................................................................................. 285 33.XX.YY Used board/disk ..................................................................... 285 40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” ....................... 285 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” .............. 285 40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” ........... 286 41.02.00 Error ...................................................................................... 286 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another tray, touch "Options" .............................................................................................. 286 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in tray ..................................................... 287 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in tray .................................................... 288 41.XX.YZ Error To continue, touch “OK” ................................................... 290 42.XX.YY .............................................................................................. 291 47.00.XX .............................................................................................. 291 47.01.XX .............................................................................................. 291 47.02.XX .............................................................................................. 292 47.03.XX .............................................................................................. 292 47.04.XX .............................................................................................. 292 47.05.00 .............................................................................................. 292 47.06.XX .............................................................................................. 292 47.WX.YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue, touch “OK” ..................... 293 49.XX.YY To continue turn off then on ....................................................... 294 50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on ..................................... 294 51.00.YY Error ...................................................................................... 296 52.XX.00 Error To continue turn off then on ............................................... 296 54.XX.YY Error ...................................................................................... 297 55.00.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on ........................... 298 55.0X.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on ........................... 298 56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................... 298 57.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on .............................................. 299 58.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on .............................................. 300 59.00.YY error To continue turn off then on ............................................... 300 ENWW xiii 59.A2.0x Error ...................................................................................... 301 60.00.0Y Tray lifting error ............................................................... 302 62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on ....................................... 302 65.X0.A1 Output accessory disconnected ................................................. 303 66.80.YY Stapler/Stacker failure ............................................................. 303 69.11.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................... 305 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on .............................................. 305 79.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on ............................................... 306 80.0X.YY Embedded JetDirect error ......................................................... 306 81.YY.ZZ EIO-1 Card Failure .................................................................. 308 82.73.46 OR 82.73.47 ......................................................................... 309 98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume ............................................... 310 98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume ............................................... 310 98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume ......................................... 310 98.00.04 Corrupt data in job data volume ............................................... 310 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt ........................................ 311 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................... 311 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk ............................... 311 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................... 311 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive ........................... 312 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ........................... 312 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ........................... 312 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade ........................... 312 99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user ....................................................... 313 99.00.10 Upgrade canceled by user ....................................................... 313 99.00.11 Upgrade canceled by user ....................................................... 313 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid ................................... 313 99.00.13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid ................................... 314 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid ................................... 314 99.00.2X .............................................................................................. 314 99.09.60 Unsupported disk .................................................................... 315 99.09.61 Unsupported disk .................................................................... 315 99.09.62 Unknown disk ......................................................................... 315 99.09.63 Incorrect disk .......................................................................... 316 99.09.64 Disk malfunction ...................................................................... 316 99.09.65 Disk data error ........................................................................ 316 99.09.66 No disk installed ..................................................................... 316 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware .......................... 316 99.XX.YY .............................................................................................. 317 full Remove all paper from bin ................................................ 317 low OR Supplies low ................................................................ 317 xiv ENWW very low OR Supplies very low .................................................. 318 [File System] device failure To clear press “OK” ......................................... 318 [File System] file operation failure To clear press “OK” ............................... 318 [File System] file system is full To clear press “OK” ..................................... 318 [File System] is not initialized ................................................................... 319 [File System] is write protected ................................................................. 319 Accept bad signature ............................................................................. 319 Bad optional tray connection ................................................................... 319 Canceling ............................................................................................. 320 Canceling... ......................................................................... 320 Cartridge Low ........................................................................................ 320 Cartridge Memory Abnormal ................................................................... 320 Cartridge Out ........................................................................................ 320 Checking engine .................................................................................... 321 Checking paper path .............................................................................. 321 Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” .......................... 321 Cleaning do not grab paper .................................................................... 321 Cleaning... ............................................................................................ 322 Clearing event log .................................................................................. 322 Clearing paper path ............................................................................... 322 Close stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door ............................................. 322 Close top cover ...................................................................................... 322 Cooling device ...................................................................................... 323 Creating cleaning page... ....................................................................... 323 Data received To print last page press “OK” ............................................. 323 Event log is empty .................................................................................. 323 Expected drive missing ........................................................................... 324 External device initializing ....................................................................... 324 Face Down Tray Full ............................................................................... 324 FIM Load Error Send full FIM on port ................................................. 324 Fuser Kit low .......................................................................................... 324 Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK” ............................................... 325 Genuine HP cartridge installed ................................................................ 325 Genuine HP supply installed .................................................................... 325 HP Secure hard drive disabled ................................................................. 325 Incompatible ............................................................................ 326 Incompatible supplies ............................................................................. 326 Initializing... .......................................................................................... 326 Install fuser unit ...................................................................................... 326 Install supplies ....................................................................................... 327 Install supply .......................................................................................... 327 ENWW xv Internal disk device failure To clear press “OK” .......................................... 327 Internal disk file operation failed .............................................................. 327 Internal disk file system is full ................................................................... 328 Internal disk is write protected .................................................................. 328 Internal disk not found ............................................................................ 328 Internal disk not functional ....................................................................... 328 Internal disk not initialized ....................................................................... 328 Internal disk spinning up ......................................................................... 329 Job not stapled due to mixed sizes ........................................................... 329 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] .................................................................. 329 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, press “OK” .................... 330 Loading program ........................................................................... 330 Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second side ................ 330 Manually feed: ................................................................. 330 Manually feed: To use another tray, press “OK” ................... 331 Moving solenoid .................................................................................... 331 Moving solenoid and motor ..................................................................... 331 No job to cancel .................................................................................... 331 NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED ................................................................... 332 Output Bin Full ....................................................................................... 332 Paused… .............................................................................................. 332 Performing Paper Path Test… ................................................................... 332 Please Wait... ........................................................................................ 332 Printing Configuration... .......................................................................... 333 Printing Event Log... ................................................................................ 333 Printing File Directory... ........................................................................... 333 Printing Font List... .................................................................................. 333 Printing Fuser Test Page... ....................................................................... 333 Printing Help Page... .............................................................................. 334 Printing Menu Map... ............................................................................. 334 Printing Registration Page… .................................................................... 334 Printing stopped ..................................................................................... 334 Printing Supplies Status Page... ................................................................ 334 Printing Usage Page... ............................................................................ 334 Printing…engine test ............................................................................... 335 Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes ...................... 335 Processing job from tray ... Do not grab paper until job completes ......... 335 Processing... .......................................................................................... 335 Processing... copy of ................................................................ 335 RAM disk device failure To clear press “OK” ............................................. 336 RAM disk file operation failed To clear press “OK” .................................... 336 xvi ENWW RAM disk file system is full To clear press “OK” ......................................... 336 RAM disk is write protected To clear press “OK” ........................................ 336 RAM disk not initialized .......................................................................... 336 Ready ................................................................................................... 337 Ready ............................................................................... 337 Receiving Upgrade ................................................................................. 337 Remove one print cartridge ..................................................................... 337 Remove USB accessory ........................................................................... 337 Replace .................................................................................. 338 Replace supplies .................................................................................... 338 Resend external accessory firmware ......................................................... 339 Resend Upgrade .................................................................................... 339 Restore Factory Settings .......................................................................... 339 ROM disk device failed To clear press “OK” ............................................. 339 ROM disk file operation failed To clear press “OK” .................................... 339 ROM disk file system is full To clear press “OK” ......................................... 340 ROM disk is write protected To clear press “OK” ....................................... 340 ROM disk not initialized To clear press “OK” ............................................ 340 Rotating Motor ....................................................................................... 340 Size Mis-Match ...................................................................................... 340 Size mismatch in Tray ...................................................................... 341 Sleep mode on ...................................................................................... 341 Staple Cartridge low .............................................................................. 341 Staple Cartridge very low ....................................................................... 341 Stapler/Stacker staple jam ...................................................................... 342 Supplies low .......................................................................................... 342 SUPPLY MEMORY WARNING ................................................................. 342 The unit has corrupt data ......................................................................... 342 Tray empty: [Type], [Size] ................................................................ 343 Tray lifting ...................................................................................... 344 Tray open ....................................................................................... 344 Tray overfilled ................................................................................. 345 Type mismatch Tray ................................................................................ 345 Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch “OK” .................................. 345 Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” ........................................................................................... 346 Unsupported tray configuration ................................................................ 346 Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory ...................... 346 Upgrade Error ....................................................................................... 346 USB accessory not functional ................................................................... 347 USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly .... 347 ENWW xvii USB is write protected To clear press “OK” ............................................... 347 USB needs too much power ..................................................................... 347 USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off then On ........... 347 USB not initialized .................................................................................. 348 USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data .................... 348 USB storage device failure To clear press “OK” ......................................... 348 USB storage file operation failed To clear press “OK” ................................ 348 USB storage file system is full To clear press “OK” ...................................... 348 Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” OR Used supply in use .......... 349 Waiting for tray to lift ...................................................................... 349 Windows Login Required to Use this Feature ............................................. 349 Event-log messages ............................................................................................... 350 Print an event log ................................................................................... 351 View an event log .................................................................................. 352 Clear an event log .................................................................................. 352 Clear jams .......................................................................................................................... 353 Jam locations ........................................................................................................ 354 Common causes of jams ........................................................................................ 355 Clear jams from the input trays ............................................................................... 356 Clear jams from Tray 1 ........................................................................... 356 Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray ................................. 356 Clear jams from the optional 1,500-sheet tray ........................................... 357 Clear jams from the optional duplexer ..................................................................... 359 Clear jams from the optional envelope feeder ........................................................... 361 Clear jams from the output areas ............................................................................ 363 Clear jams from the rear output bin .......................................................... 363 Clear jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker ............................... 364 Clear paper jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker ...... 364 Clear staple jams from the optional stapler/stacker ..................... 365 Clear jams from the optional 5-bin mailbox ............................................... 367 Clear jams from the fuser ....................................................................................... 369 Clear jams from the print-cartridge (top cover) .......................................................... 373 Change jam recovery ............................................................................................ 375 Paper does not feed automatically .......................................................................................... 376 The product does not pick up paper ........................................................................ 376 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ........................................................... 376 Prevent paper jams ................................................................................................ 376 Use manual print modes ....................................................................................................... 378 Solve image-quality problems ................................................................................................ 380 Print-quality examples ............................................................................................ 380 Clean the product ................................................................................................................ 388 xviii ENWW Clean the paper path ............................................................................................ 388 Set up an auto cleaning page .................................................................. 388 Solve performance problems ................................................................................................. 389 Solve connectivity problems ................................................................................................... 390 Solve direct-connect problems ................................................................................. 390 Solve network problems ......................................................................................... 390 Service mode functions ......................................................................................................... 391 Service menu ........................................................................................................ 391 Product resets ....................................................................................................... 392 Restore factory-set defaults ....................................................................... 392 Clean Disk and Partial Clean functions .................................................................... 393 Active and repository firmware locations ................................................... 393 Partial Clean ......................................................................................... 394 Execute a Partial Clean ............................................................ 394 Clean Disk ............................................................................................ 395 Execute a Clean Disk ............................................................... 395 Product updates ................................................................................................................... 397 Determine the installed revision of firmware .............................................................. 397 Perform a firmware upgrade ................................................................................... 397 Embedded Web Server ........................................................................... 397 USB storage device (Preboot menu) .......................................................... 398 USB storage device (control-panel menu) ................................................... 399 4 Parts and diagrams ...................................................................................................... 401 Order parts by authorized service providers ............................................................................ 402 Order parts, accessories, and supplies .................................................................... 402 Supplies part numbers ........................................................................................... 402 Customer-self repair parts ....................................................................................... 402 Accessories part numbers ....................................................................................... 404 Related documentation and software ....................................................................... 405 How to use the parts lists and diagrams .................................................................................. 406 Assembly locations ............................................................................................................... 407 Base product (no optional trays or accessories) ......................................................... 407 Covers ................................................................................................................................ 410 Product base ........................................................................................................ 410 Internal components ............................................................................................................. 412 Internal components (1 of 3) ................................................................................... 412 Internal components (2 of 3) ................................................................................... 414 Internal components (3 of 3) ................................................................................... 416 High-voltage power supply ..................................................................................... 418 Cassette (Tray 2) ................................................................................................... 420 ENWW xix Cassette (custom media) ......................................................................................... 422 Paper feed roller assembly ..................................................................................... 424 Registration assembly ............................................................................................ 426 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly .................................................................................. 428 Paper delivery assembly ........................................................................................ 430 Fuser assembly ..................................................................................................... 432 PCAs (product base) .............................................................................................. 434 Input devices ....................................................................................................................... 436 1x500-sheet feeder ............................................................................................... 436 Covers (1x500) ..................................................................................... 436 Main body (1x500) ................................................................................ 438 Cassette (1x500) ................................................................................... 440 PCA (1x500) ......................................................................................... 442 1x1500-sheet paper deck ...................................................................................... 444 Covers (1x1500) ................................................................................... 444 Front door assembly (1x1500) ................................................................. 446 Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) ..................................................................... 448 Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) ..................................................................... 450 Paper pickup assembly (1x500) ............................................................... 452 PCA (1x1500) ....................................................................................... 454 Duplexer ............................................................................................................................. 456 Main body (duplexer) ............................................................................................ 456 PCA (duplexer) ..................................................................................................... 458 Envelope feeder ................................................................................................................... 460 Covers (envelope feeder) ....................................................................................... 460 Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) ....................................................................... 462 Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) ....................................................................... 464 PCA (envelope feeder) ........................................................................................... 466 Output devices .................................................................................................................... 468 Stapler/stacker multi-bin mailbox (MBM) .................................................................. 468 Covers (MBM) ....................................................................................... 468 Main body (MBM) .................................................................................. 470 Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) ........................................................ 470 Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) ........................................................ 472 PCA (MBM) ........................................................................................... 474 Stacker and Stapler/Stacker (S and S/S) ................................................................. 476 Covers (S and S/S) ................................................................................ 476 Main body (SS) ...................................................................................... 478 Main body (S) ....................................................................................... 480 Middle assemblies (S and S/S) ................................................................ 482 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) ........................... 482 xx ENWW Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) ........................... 484 Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) ........................................... 486 Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) ........................................... 488 PCA (S and S/S) .................................................................................... 490 Alphabetical parts list ........................................................................................................... 492 Numerical parts list .............................................................................................................. 501 Appendix A Service and support ..................................................................................... 511 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ............................................................................. 512 HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement .................. 514 Data stored on the print cartridge ........................................................................................... 515 End User License Agreement .................................................................................................. 516 Customer self-repair warranty service ..................................................................................... 519 Customer support ................................................................................................................. 520 Repack the product .............................................................................................................. 521 Appendix B Product specifications ................................................................................... 523 Physical specifications .......................................................................................................... 524 Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .......................................... 524 Operating environment ......................................................................................................... 525 Appendix C Regulatory information ................................................................................. 527 FCC regulations ................................................................................................................... 528 Environmental product stewardship program ........................................................................... 529 Protecting the environment ...................................................................................... 529 Ozone production ................................................................................................. 529 Power consumption ............................................................................................... 529 Toner consumption ................................................................................................ 529 Paper use ............................................................................................................. 529 Plastics ................................................................................................................. 529 HP LaserJet print supplies ....................................................................................... 530 Return and recycling instructions ............................................................................. 530 United States and Puerto Rico .................................................................. 530 Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) .................................. 530 Single returns .......................................................................... 530 Shipping ................................................................................ 530 Non-U.S. returns .................................................................................... 531 Paper .................................................................................................................. 531 Material restrictions ............................................................................................... 531 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ...... 532 ENWW xxi Chemical substances ............................................................................................. 532 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ......................................................................... 532 For more information ............................................................................................. 532 Declaration of Conformity ..................................................................................................... 534 Certificate of Volatility .......................................................................................................... 536 Types of memory ................................................................................................... 536 Volatile memory ..................................................................................... 536 Non-volatile memory .............................................................................. 536 Hard-disk-drive memory .......................................................................... 536 Safety statements ................................................................................................................. 537 Laser safety .......................................................................................................... 537 Canadian DOC regulations .................................................................................... 537 VCCI statement (Japan) .......................................................................................... 537 Power cord instructions .......................................................................................... 537 Power cord statement (Japan) ................................................................................. 537 EMC statement (China) .......................................................................................... 538 EMC statement (Korea) .......................................................................................... 538 EMI statement (Taiwan) .......................................................................................... 538 Product Stability .................................................................................................... 538 Laser statement for Finland ..................................................................................... 538 GS statement (Germany) ........................................................................................ 539 Substances Table (China) ....................................................................................... 540 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) ............................................. 540 Index ............................................................................................................................... 541 xxii ENWW 1 ENWW Theory of operation ● Basic operation ● Formatter system ● Engine-control system ● Image-formation system ● Laser/scanner system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● 1x500-sheet paper feeder ● 1x1500-sheet paper deck ● Envelope feeder ● Duplexer 1 Basic operation Major print systems Operation can be divided into the following systems: ● Engine-control system (which includes the power supply and DC controller PCA) ● Laser/scanner system (which forms the latent image on a photosensitive drum) ● Image-formation system (which transfers a toner image onto the print media) ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system (which consists of various rollers and transports the media through the product) ● Options Figure 1-1 Major product systems LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM IMAGE-FORMATION SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM OPTION 2 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Internal components Figure 1-2 Internal components, product base 19 ENWW 1 2 18 17 16 3 4 15 5 6 14 13 12 7 8 11 9 10 1 Face-down delivery roller 11 Feed roller 2 Fuser sleeve unit 12 Tray 2 separation roller 3 Laser/scanner unit 13 Tray 2 feed roller 4 Photosensitive drum 14 Tray 2 pickup roller 5 Transfer roller 15 Print cartridge 6 Registration shutter 16 Pressure roller 7 Pre-transfer roller 17 Fuser 8 Tray 1 pickup roller 18 Fuser delivery roller 9 Tray 1 feed roller 19 Intermediate delivery roller 10 Tray 1 separation roller Basic operation 3 Figure 1-3 Internal components, 1x500-sheet feeder 1 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller 4 Feed roller 2 4 3 Figure 1-4 Internal components, 1,500-sheet paper deck 1 4 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller Chapter 1 Theory of operation 2 3 4 ENWW 3 Separation roller 4 Feed roller Figure 1-5 Internal components, envelope feeder 1 ENWW 2 3 4 1 Feed roller 2 Upper separation roller 3 Lower separation roller 4 Separation guide 5 Weight 6 Pickup roller 5 6 Basic operation 5 Figure 1-6 Internal components, duplexer 1 2 1 Oblique rollers 2 Re-pickup rollers Figure 1-7 Internal components, custom media cassette 1 1 6 Separation roller Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Operating sequence A microprocessor on the DC controller PCA controls the product operating sequence. The following table describes the basic operating sequence from when the product power is turned on until the final printed page is delivered to an output bin. NOTE: The product takes about two minutes and twenty seconds to initialize. Table 1-1 Product operating sequence Period Duration Operation WAIT From the time the power is turned on, the door is closed or Sleep mode is released until the product gets ready for a print operation. ● Brings the product to standby condition. ● Pressurizes the fuser pressure roller. ● Detects the print cartridge. STBY (Standby) From the end of WAIT or LSTR period until either the print command is received from the formatter or the power button is turned off. ● Maintains the product in printable condition. ● Puts the product in Sleep mode when the formatter sends a sleep command. INTR (Initial rotation period) From the time the print command is received from the formatter until the media is picked up. Starts up each high-voltage bias, laser/scanner unit, and fuser for printing. PRINT From the end of INTR period until the last paper completes the fixing operation. ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drum based on the signals from the formatter. ● Transfers and fuses the toner image to the print media. ● Moves the last printed sheet out of the product. ● Stops the laser/scanner unit operation and high-voltage biases. LSTR (Last rotation period) From the end of PRINT period until the motors stop rotating. The product enters the INTR period as soon as the LSTR period is completed, if the formatter sends another print command. ENWW Basic operation 7 Formatter system The formatter is involved in the following procedures. ● Controlling the Sleep mode ● Receiving and processing print data from the various product inputs ● Monitoring control-panel functions and relaying product status information (through the control panel and the bidirectional input/output) ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA ● Storing font information ● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process. The dc controller PCA synchronizes the image-formation system with the paper-input and -output systems, and then signals the formatter to send the print-image data. The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for the memory DIMM and the hard-disk (hard disk drive or solid state drive). Sleep mode When the product is in Sleep mode, the control-panel backlight is dimmed, but the product retains all product settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is a 30-minute idle time. Sleep mode also can be turned off from the Administration menu on the control panel. The product exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs. ● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the serial port. ● A control panel key is pressed. ● The top cover is opened. ● The engine-test button is pressed. NOTE: Error messages override the Sleep message. The product enters Sleep mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear. Input/output The following sections discuss the input and output features of the product. USB The product includes a universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 connection. 8 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Embedded print server For all models except the HP LaserJet 4014 base model, the product includes an HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network. Hard-disk The hard-disk is mounted on the formatter cage door. The hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and signatures. NOTE: All models have a solid state module (SSM) installed except the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M603xh. CPU The product formatter incorporates a 800 MHz RISC processor. Memory If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory, a clearable warning message appears on the control panel. Random-access memory The formatter has one DIMM slot. All models come with 512MB of memory installed. Additional memory can be added up to a maximum of 1GB. The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also increase the print speed for complex graphics. Nonvolatile memory The product uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected. DIMM slot The DIMM slot can be used to add product memory. ENWW Formatter system 9 PJL overview Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, use PJL to perform a variety of functions. ● Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The product can send the host computer information about such things as the control panel settings, and the control panel settings can be changed from the host through two-way communication. ● Dynamic I/O switching. The product can be configured with a host on each I/O by using dynamic I/O switching. Even when the product is offline, it can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. ● Context-sensitive switching. The product can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself in that personality. ● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the product in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs are printed in landscape mode only if they are formatted for it. PML The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status monitoring through the I/O ports. Control panel The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from a control-panel PCA. 10 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Engine-control system The engine control system coordinates all product functions and controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system contains the following components: ● DC controller ● Low-voltage power supply ● High-voltage power supply ● Fuser control Figure 1-8 Engine-control system ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM DC controller LASER/SCANNER SYSTEM Low-voltage power supply Formatte r IMAGE-FORMA TION SYSTEM High-voltage power supply PICKUP-AND-FEED SYSTEM Fuser control ENWW Engine-control system 11 DC controller PCA The DC controller PCA controls the operation of the product and its components. The DC controller PCA starts product operation when the power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller PCA. After the product enters the standby sequence, the DC controller PCA sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other components based on the print command and image data that the host computer sends. Figure 1-9 DC controller PCA CL Clutch Fan Fuser uni t M Motor Fuser control Solenoid AC input Low-voltage power supply Switch DC controller Sensor Transfer roller High-voltage power supply Sensor Cartridge Option Power supply unit Walkup USB port Formatter 12 Chapter 1 Theory of operation Laser/scanner unit ENWW Sensors, solenoids, and switches The product has twelve sensors, two solenoids, and three switches. Sensors are used for remote detection of various functions during product operation. Solenoid and switches are used for product operation control. Table 1-2 Sensors, solenoids, and switches Description Item Component Sensors PS101 Cassette media presence senor PS102 Pre-feed sensor PS103 Top-of-page sensor PS104 Face-down tray media full sensor PS105 MP tray (Tray 1) media presence sensor PS106 Media width sensor 1 PS107 Media stack surface sensor 1 PS108 Media width sensor 2 PS699 Fixing (fuser) pressure release sensor PS700 Fixing (fuser) delivery sensor PS907 Media stack surface sensor 2 TH3 Environmental sensor SL101 Casette pickup solenoid SL102 MP tray (Tray 1) pickup solenoid SW101 Door open detection switch SW102 Cassette media size switch SW800 Test print switch Solenoids Switches ENWW Engine-control system 13 Motors and fans The product has four motors and four fan motors. The motors are used for the media feeding and image formation. The fan motors are used for preventing a temperature rise inside the product. Table 1-3 Fans Description Cooling area Type Speed Cooling fan FN101 Cartridge area and power supply area Intake Full/Half1 Cooling fan FN102 Cartridge area Intake Full2 Cooling fan FN103 Cartridge area Intake Full2 Cooling fan FN301 Cartridge area and laser/scanner Intake Full2 Cooling fan FN101 rotates at full speed for eight seconds when the product is turned on, and then decreases to half-speed for approximately 10 minutes. After that time period, if there is no print job in the print queue, the fan will stop completely. The fan rotates at full speed during a print job. This fan operates at full speed only during a print job. Otherwise, it does not rotate. 1 2 Table 1-4 Motors Description Driving parts Type Failure detection Paper feed motor (M101) Drives the Tray 1 pickup roller, Tray 2 pickup roller, and feed roller DC Yes Drum motor (M102) Drives the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, and transfer roller DC Yes Fuser motor (M299) Drives the pressure roller and feed roller—when rotated counterclockwise it releases the fusing pressure for easier jam removal DC Yes Lifter motor (M103) Drives the lifting plate of the tray DC No Failure detection Motor failure The DC controller determines a motor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions: ● Motor start-up failure: The motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified period from when each motor starts up. ● Motor rotational failure: The rotational speed of the motor is out of a specified range for a specified period from when it once reaches a specified speed. Fan motor failure The DC controller determines a fan motor failure and notifies the formatter when the fan locks for a specified period from when each fan starts up. 14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Engine power supply The power supply consists of the fuser-control circuit, the high-voltage circuit, and the low-voltage circuit. The fuser-control and high-voltage circuits control the temperature of the fuser and generate highvoltage according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The low-voltage circuit generates the DC voltages that other components in the product use (for example the DC controller PCA, the motors, and fans). Fuser-control circuit The fuser-control circuit controls the fuser components. The two fuser heaters provide the high temperatures that cause the toner to permanently bond to the media. The fuser thermistor monitors the fuser temperatures. The thermal switch detects abnormally high fuser temperatures and interrupts the supply of voltage to the fuser if the temperature is too high. Figure 1-10 Fuser control TH2 TH1 Fuser control TP1 FUSER HEATER DRIVE signal H1 Fuser heater drive circuit Fuser sleeve Relay Pressure roller Fuser heater safety circuit CPU FUSER HEATER TEMPERATURE signal DC controller ENWW Engine-control system 15 Fuser temperature control The fuser temperature control detects the temperature of the fuser heater surface, and then controls the FUSER HEATER DRIVE (FSRD1) signal to the fuser heater until the fuser heater temperature reaches the target temperature. The DC controller controls the FSRD1 signal by monitoring the detected fuser heater temperature—using the thermistor (TH3)—and then holds the heater at the target temperature. Figure 1-11 Fuser temperature control AC input DC controller Fuser control Zero crossing circuit /ZEROX Relay (RL101) FSRSAFE /RLD +24VC Relay (RL102) Fuser heater safety circuit CURRMS Current detection circuit FSRD1 Fuser heater drive circuit FSRTH2 CPU /AC200 JP1001 100V: Open 200V: Close +3.3V TB11 TB10 /HITMP Q704 FSRTH1 /FSRARI TH2 TH1 TP1 H1 J128 2 1 16 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Low-voltage power supply The low-voltage power supply converts AC power from the power receptacle into DC power to cover the DC loads. Figure 1-12 Low-voltage power supply Power supply unit DC controller Low-voltage power supply Fuse (FU1) ACH Noise filter ACN +5V Fuser control 5VPRO +5V generation circuit Power button (SW1) +24VA Rectifying circuit +3.3R Sleep switch 3 Rectifying circuit +24VA +24U +24R Abnormal status latch photocoupler (PC1) Rectifying circuit 100V: Open 200V: Close JP1001 ENWW ConstantConstantvoltage control voltage photocoupler control circuit (PC2) High-voltage power supply Sleep switch 2 /DOPEN +24VC Protection circuit Sleep switch 1 +24VB /AC200 +24VC Noise filter Control IC (IC1) +24VA Transformer (T1) Fuse (FU2) +3.3V Door open detection switch (SW101) Engine-control system 17 High-voltage power supply The high-voltage power supply applies the high-voltage biases to the following components: ● Primary charging roller ● Developing roller ● Transfer roller ● Fuser sleeve ● Pressure roller Figure 1-13 High-voltage power supply Cartridge From antenna From antenna Photosensitive drum Fuser sleeve To developing cylinder To primary charging roller Transfer roller Transfer high-voltage generation circuit Primary charging high-voltage generation circuit High-voltage power supply TB502 ANT1 T503 TB501 TB503 Toner level detection circuit Developing highvoltage generation circuit TNRSP1 Fuser high-voltage generation circuit TB504 ANT2 TB21 TNRSP2 KAATUBIAS TB20 TRAD FILMBIAS Pressure roller Power supply unit DC controller 18 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Overcurrent/overvoltage protection If a short-circuit or other problem on the load side causes an excessive current flow or generates abnormal voltage, the overcurrent/overvoltage protection systems automatically cut off the output voltage to protect the power-supply circuit. If the overcurrent or overvoltage protection system are activated and the power-supply circuit does not generate DC voltage, turn the power off, correct the problem, and then turn the product on again. The circuit has two fuses (FU1, FU2), which break and cut off the output voltage if overcurrent flows through the alternating current (AC) line. ENWW Engine-control system 19 Image-formation system The image-formation system is the central hub of the product. It forms the toner image on the media. The following are the main components of the image-formation system: ● Cartridge ● Transfer roller ● Fuser The DC controller controls the laser/scanner unit and high-voltage power supply to form an image on the media according to the VIDEO signals. 20 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Image-formation process The image formation system is the central hub of the product. It also forms the toner image on the media. Figure 1-14 Image-formation system Cartridge Laser/scanner unit Laser beam Photosensitive drum Fuser sleeve To developing cylinder To primary charging roller Transfer roller Pressure roller TB20 TB21 TB504 T503 TB502 Power supply unit High-voltage power supply circuit DC controller VIDEO signal Formatter The image-formation process contains eight steps divided among five functional blocks: ● Block 1: Latent image formation Step 1: Primary charging Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ● Block 2: Developing Step 3: Developing ● ENWW Block 3: Transfer Image-formation system 21 Step 4: Transfer Step 5: Separation ● Block 4: Fusing Step 6: Fusing ● Block 5: Drum cleaning Step 7: Drum cleaning Step 8: Drum charge elimination Figure 1-15 Image-formation process Latent image formation Media path 2. Laser-beam exposure Direction of the drum rotation Block 1. Primary charging Developing Step 8. Drum charge elimination 3. Developing Drum cleaning 7. Drum cleaning Delivery 6. Fuser Fuser 22 Chapter 1 Theory of operation 5. Separation 4. Transfer Pickup Transfer ENWW Block 1: Latent image formation During the two steps that comprise this block, an invisible latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum. Step 1: Primary charging To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The product charges the photosensitive drum surface directly from the primary charging roller. The DC bias and AC bias are applied to the primary charging roller to maintain a constant charge on the drum surface. Figure 1-16 Primary charging Primary charging roller AC bias Photosensitive drum DC bias Step 2: Laser-beam exposure The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on portions of the drum surface. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized. Figure 1-17 Laser-beam exposure Laser beam Unexposed area ENWW Exposed area Image-formation system 23 Block 2: Developing Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum. Step 3: Developing Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing cylinder rotates against the developing blade. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum surface because the drum surface has a higher potential. The AC bias that is superimposed with the developing negative DC bias is applied to the developing cylinder. Figure 1-18 Developing Blade Developing cylinder Exposed area Unexposed area Unexposed area AC bias Exposed area DC bias Photosensitive drum 24 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Block 3: Transfer During the steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the print media. Step 4: Transfer The positive DC bias is applied to the transfer roller to charge the media positive. The positively charged media attracts the negatively charged toner from the photosensitive drum surface. Figure 1-19 Transfer Photosensitive drum Media Transfer roller DC bias Step 5: Separation The curvature elasticity of the print media causes it to separate from the photosensitive drum surface. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the media for stable media feed and image quality. Figure 1-20 Separation Photosensitive drum Media Static charge eliminator Transfer roller ENWW Image-formation system 25 Block 4: Fusing The toner image is fixed onto the print media. Step 6: Fusing The product uses the on-demand fixing method to fix the toner image onto the media. The image is permanently affixed to the print media by the heat and pressure. Figure 1-21 Fusing Fuser heater Brush Fuser sleeve Toner Media Pressure roller DC bias DC bias 26 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Block 5: Drum cleaning The residual (waste) toner is cleared from the photosensitive drum surface to prepare for the next latent image formation. Step 7: Drum cleaning The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum and deposits it in the waste toner container. Figure 1-22 Drum cleaning Cleaning blade Waste toner container Photosensitive drum Step 8: Drum charge elimination The residual charge on the photosensitive drum surface is eliminated to avoid uneven image. The residual charge of the previous image is left on the drum surface after the transfer operation and this affects the following image formation. The product eliminates this residual charge by emitting a laser beam to the drum surface. The drum charge elimination is operated only during the last rotation period. Figure 1-23 Drum charge elimination Laser beam ENWW Image-formation system 27 Laser/scanner system The laser/scanner system forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals sent from the formatter. The main components, such as the laser driver and scanner motor, are assembled as a laser/scanner unit and controlled by the DC controller. The DC controller allows the laser to emit light according to the VIDEO signals. The laser beam passes through the lenses and enters 28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW the scanner mirror that is rotating at constant speed. The laser beam is reflected by the scanner mirror, passes through the lenses, and scans on the photosensitive drum. Figure 1-24 Laser/scanner system Formatter Scanner motor unit BD INPUT signal VIDEO signal LASER CONTROL signal SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal DC controller Laser driver Scanner mirror BD PCA Photosensitive drum The laser scanner uses two laser diodes to scan two lines simultaneously, producing high-speed laser scanning. After receiving the print command from the host computer, the DC controller PCA activates the scanner motor, which rotates the six-sided scanner mirror. The laser-driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to signals from the DC controller PCA. The two laser beams strike the sixsided scanning mirror and are directed through the focusing lenses and onto the photosensitive drum. ENWW Laser/scanner system 29 The modulated laser beams generate the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the image data signals that the DC controller PCA sends. 1. As it receives a print command from the formatter, the dc controller outputs the SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signal (/ACC) and rotates the scanner motor in order to rotate the sixsided mirror. 2. As the scanner motor starts rotating, the dc controller uses a LASER CONTROL signal (CNT0, CNT1, CNT2) to receive the /BD INPUT signal (/BDI) and force the laser to emit light . The dc controller detects the rotational speed of the scanner motor based on the timing the /BD1 signal is input and controls the speed to keep it constant. 3. While the scanner motor rotates at a constant speed, the dc controller passes the VIDEO signals from the formatter on to the laser driver PCA. The laser driver PCA emits light from the two laser diodes according to these signals: VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, /VDO2. 4. The two laser beams pass through the collimator lens and cylindrical lens and strike the six-sided mirror that is rotating at a constant speed. 5. The laser beams, that are reflected off of the six-sided mirror pass through the focus lens and reflective mirror and focus on the photosensitive drum. The laser beams scan the drum surface at a constant speed. 6. As the six-sided mirror rotates and the laser beam scans the drum surface at a constant speed, a latent image forms on the drum surface. Laser failure detection The DC controller determines a laser/scanner unit failure and notifies the formatter, if the laser/scanner unit encounters the following conditions: 30 ● Laser failure: The laser intensity is not detected for a specified value when the laser is turned on for a specified period during the scanner unit start-up period. ● BD failure: The BD interval is out of a specified value during a print operation. ● Scanner motor start-up failure: The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period from when the scanner motor starts rotation. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of various rollers that the product motors drive. The product uses Tray 1 (the manual feeding tray) and a cassette in Tray 2 as media sources. The printed media is delivered to either the rear output bin (straight-through printing) or the top output bin (the default destination). A number of 1x500-sheet feeders and one 1,500-sheet paper deck can be added to certain models. These accessories are discussed later in this chapter. The Tray 1 paper sensor (on the Tray 1 pickup assembly; PS105) detects media in Tray 1. The Tray 2 paper sensor (PS101) detects media in Tray 2. The paper-size switch (SW102) detects the media size that is loaded in Tray 2. Two motors, a clutch, and a solenoid that are controlled by the DC controller PCA drive all of the rollers in the product. The pre-feed, top-of-page, and fuser-assembly delivery sensors (PS102, PS103, PS700) detect media arriving and passing along the paper path. If the media does not reach or pass these sensors within a specific amount of time, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCA halts the product functions and a jam error message appears on the control-panel display. Figure 1-25 Pickup, feed, and delivery system PS104 Face-down delivery roller PS699 PS700 Fixing sleeve Pressure roller Registration shutter Photosensitive drum PS103 Pre-transfer roller PS106 Transfer roller PS108 Lifting plate Feed roller PS105 PS102 PS107 PS907 Feed roller PS101 Lifter Separation roller SW102 Pickup arm Pickup roller Lifting plate The pickup-and-feed system is divided into two blocks: The pickup-and-feed block and the fuser/delivery block. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 31 Figure 1-26 Pickup, feed, and delivery blocks Face-down delivery Fixing/delivery unit Face-up delivery Pickup/feed unit Pickup-and-feed block The following functions take place in the pickup-and-feed block: ● Detection of media ● Detection of media-size ● Detection of media entering the paper path from Tray 1 or Tray 2 ● Lifting of the Tray 2 paper plate ● Prevention of multiple-feeds ● Correction of page skew When it receives a print command from the host computer, the DC controller PCA turns on the feed motor (M101) power. The motor drives the Tray 2 pickup, feed, and separation rollers. The drum motor power also turns on. The laser/ scanner motor power turns on. The DC controller PCA then activates the feed clutch (CL101) to rotate the feed roller. The Tray 2 pickup solenoid is activated (SL101) and the pickup arm descends. The pickup roller touches the media and a sheet is fed into the product. The separation roller prevents multiple sheets of media from being fed at one time. As the pre-feed sensor (PS102) detects the media, the dc controller PCA turns off the clutch, which stops the media. When the DC controller PCA detects that the laser/scanner is ready it activates the feed 32 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW clutch again. The feed roller moves the media farther into the product. The registration shutter corrects page skew and the media is transported to the fuser/delivery block. Fuser/delivery block The fuser/delivery block consists of rollers, sensors, the fuser, and the output delivery assembly. The rollers transport the media through the fuser/delivery block paper path. The fuser applies heat and pressure to the media to permanently bond the toner image to the media. The output delivery assembly sends the printed media either to the rear output bin (if the rear output door is open) or to the top output bin (the default output delivery bin). Sensors along the paper path detect media movement, jams, and the top output-bin capacity. Pressure roller pressure release control The product releases the pressure roller except during a print operation to improve usability for jammed paper removal. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor (M299) to rotate the fuser pressure release cam. The pressure roller is pressurized or depressurized due to the shape of the cam. The DC controller reverses the fuser motor to control the pressure roller pressurize or depressurize state according to the signal sent from the fuser pressure release sensor (PS699). Figure 1-27 Pressure roller pressure release control FIXING MOTOR DRIVE signal FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE signal DC controller M299 Fuser motor Fuser pressure release cam PS699 Fuser pressure release sensor Pressure roller Fuser sleeve ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 33 The pressure roller pressure is released under the following conditions: ● A paper jam is detected ● Factory shipment The DC controller determines a fuser pressure release mechanism failure and notifies the formatter if the fuser roller release control is not completed within a specified period when it reverses the fuser motor. Paper trays Printing from Tray 1 The Tray 1 paper sensor (PS105) detects the presence of media in Tray 1. When the DC controller PCA receives the print command, the product starts the initial rotation phase, which consists of feed motor warm-up, scanner motor warm-up, high-voltage control sequence, and fuser warm-up. When the initial rotation phase ends, the Tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL102) is activated. The cam rotates, the paper-tray lifter rises, and the media comes in contact with the Tray 1 pickup roller. At the same time, the Tray 1 pickup roller rotates twice and picks up a sheet of media from Tray 1. The separation pad prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet. The sheet then reaches the registration assembly, where its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages; through the delivery unit; and is to the output bin. NOTE: If media is removed from Tray 1 after the initial rotation phase, but before the pickup roller pulls the media from the tray, the Tray 1 pickup roller might continue to rotate up to six times, after which a jam detected. Printing from Tray 2 When the DC controller PCA receives the print command, the feed motor (M101) and scanner motor start their rotation. When the feed motor reaches its prescribed speed, the feed roller clutch (CL101) and Tray 2 pickup solenoid (SL101) are activated. (The feed motor rotation drives the Tray 2 pickup roller, Tray 2 feed roller, Tray 2 separation roller, and paper-feed rollers.) The Tray 2 pickup roller, which the pickup solenoid activates, rotates once and picks up the media in the tray. The separation roller prevents additional sheets from feeding with the first sheet, and the media is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102). The sheet then reaches the registration assembly, where its skew is corrected. The sheet then passes through the transfer, separation, and fusing stages; through the delivery unit; and to the output bin. Cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection The media size detection switch (SW102) detects the size of media loaded in the cassette and the presence of the cassette. The media size detection switch—comprised of three switches: upper, center, and lower—is active when the cassette media size plate is correctly positioned to the loaded paper size and the cassette is installed in the product. The DC controller determines the paper size by monitoring the switch conditions. 34 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW the DC controller determines a size mismatch and sends a signal to the formatter if the switches detect a paper size that is different from the size specified by the formatter. Table 1-5 Cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection (Tray 2 and 1x500sheet feeder) Media size ENWW Media size switch settings Upper Center Lower No cassette Off Off Off A4 Off Off On B5 Off On On A5 On Off Off Legal On On Off Letter Off On Off Executive On Off On Universal On On On Pickup, feed, and delivery system 35 Jam detection The product uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed Figure 1-28 Jam detection sensors PS106 PS108 PS700 PS103 PS102 PS1603 PS1603 PS1603 PS1704 PS102: Pre-feed sensor PS108: Media width sensor 2 PS103: Top of page sensor PS700: Fuser delivery sensor PS106: Media width sensor 1 PS1603: Media path sensor (paper feeder) PS1704: Media path sensor (paper deck) The product determines a jam if the sensor detects paper presence at a specified timing stored in the DC controller. The DC controller stops a print operation and notifies the formatter when it determines a jam occurrence. The product detects the following jams. 36 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup delay jam 1 a. Standard equipped cassette The top of page sensor (PS103) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the pre-feed sensor (PS102) detects the leading edge. b. Pickup option The top of page sensor (PS103) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the feed clutch (CL101) is turned on. c. MP tray (Tray 1) The top of page sensor (PS103) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the MP tray pickup solenoid (SL102) is turned on. Pickup delay jam 2 a. Standard equipped cassette The pre-feed sensor (PS102) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when a pickup operation starts. b. Top pickup source of pickup option The PF media path sensor (PS1603) for the top PF cassette or the PD media path sensor (PS1704) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when a pickup operation starts. c. Lower pickup sources of pickup option The PF media path sensor (PS1603) for the top PF cassette does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the PF media path sensor (PS1603) or the PD media path sensor (PS1704), either one of that equipped to the pickup source that picks up the media, detects the leading edge of media. Pickup delay jam 3 The PF media path sensor (PS1603) or PD media path sensor (PS1704), either one of that equipped to the pickup source that picks up the media, does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when a pickup operation from the lower pickup sources of the pickup option. Pickup stationary jam a. Top of page sensor detection The top of page sensor (PS103) does not detect the trailing edge of media within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge. b. Media width sensors detection Both of the media width sensors (PS106, PS108) do not detect the trailing edge of media within as pecified period from when the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the trailing edge. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 37 Delivery delay jam The fuser delivery sensor (PS700) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the leading edge. Delivery stationary jam The fuser delivery sensor (PS700) does not detect the trailing edge of media within a specified period from when the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the trailing edge. Residual media jam 1 a. b. Either one of the following sensors detects media presence when the wait sequence starts: ◦ Top of page sensor (PS103) ◦ Media width sensors (PS106, PS108) ◦ Fixing delivery sensor (PS700) The fuser delivery sensor (PS700) detects media presence before the top of page sensor (PS103) or the media width sensor (PS106, PS108) detects leading edge of media during an automatic delivery operation. NOTE: The automatic delivery delivers the deliverable residual media automatically during the initial rotation period when the power is turned on or when the door is closed. The DC controller sends an automatic delivery request to the formatter and stops a print operation when it determines that there is deliverable residual media. Then the formatter sends an automatic delivery command and the DC controller drives media feed system to deliver the residual media out of the product. c. 38 Either one of the following sensors detects media presence during an automatic delivery operation: ◦ Pre-feed sensor (PS102) ◦ Top of page sensor (PS103) ◦ Media width sensors (PS106, PS108) ◦ Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) ◦ PF media path sensor (PS1603) ◦ PD media path sensor (PS1704) Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW d. e. The door open is detected when either one of the following sensors detects media presence during an automatic delivery operation: ◦ Top of page sensor (PS103) ◦ Media width sensors (PS106, PS108) ◦ Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) A stop control command is received when either one of the following sensors detects media presence during an automatic delivery operation: ◦ Pre-feed sensor (PS102) ◦ Top of page sensor (PS103) ◦ Media width sensors (PS106, PS108) ◦ Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) ◦ PF media path sensor (PS1603) ◦ PD media path sensor (PS1704) Residual media jam 2 a. b. Either one of the following sensors detects media presence when a print operation completes: ◦ Pre-feed sensor (PS102) ◦ Top of page sensor (PS103) ◦ Media width sensors (PS106, PS108) ◦ Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) ◦ PF media path sensor (PS1603) ◦ PD media path sensor (PS1704) A stop control command is received from the formatter after a pickup operation has started. Door open jam The door open is detected after a pickup operation has started. Wrapping jam The fuser delivery sensor (PS700) detects media absence before it detects the trailing edge of media after a specified period from when it detects the leading edge. ENWW Pickup, feed, and delivery system 39 1x500-sheet paper feeder The 1x500-sheet paper feeder (PF) is optionally installed at the bottom of the product. It features paper pickup and paper feeding to the product. The product supports up to four optional paper feeders. Figure 1-29 1x500-sheet paper feeder Face-down delivery Face-up delivery Paper Feeder The paper feeder driver controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder and the serial communication with the DC controller of the product. The DC controller sends several commands to the paper feeder driver at necessary timing. The paper feeder driver drives each load, such as motor and solenoid, according to the commands. The paper feeder driver responds the status information of the paper feeder to the DC controller. The DC controller determines a paper feeder illegal connection and notifies the formatter if it does not make the serial communication with the paper feeder driver during the pre-rotation period when the product is turned on, when recovering from the Sleep mode or when the door is closed. The product supplies DC24V to the paper feeder. The DC3.3V for sensors and ICs is generated from the DC24V in the paper feeder driver. 40 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-30 1x500-sheet paper feeder circuit diagram Paper feeder +3.3V +24V M Motor +3.3V generation circuit Solenoid +24V Switch DC controller Sensor Paper feeder driver Paper feeder/Paper deck Component Description Motor M1600 Paper feeder lift motor Sensor PS1600 Paper feeder media presence sensor PS1601 Paper feeder media stack surface sensor 1 PS1602 Paper feeder media stack surface sensor 2 PS1603 Paper feeder media path sensor Solenoid SL1600 Paper feeder pickup solenoid Switch SW1600 Paper feeder media size switch Pickup-and-feed operation (PF) The paper feeder uses same mechanism of the product for the pickup-and-feed operation. The rollers used in the paper feeder are driven by the feed motor (M101) of the product through the gears. Pickup and feed sequence of operation (PF) ENWW 1. The lifting plate moves up to the position where the paper can be picked up after the product is turned on or the paper feeder cassette is installed. 2. The DC controller drives the feed motor (M101) when it receives a print command from the formatter. 3. The DC controller outputs a pickup command to the paper feeder driver. 4. The paper feeder driver turns on the PF pickup solenoid (SL1600) when it receives a pickup command. Accordingly the PF pickup roller, PF feed roller and PF feed roller 1 rotate to pick up 1x500-sheet paper feeder 41 media in the PF cassette. (PF cassette pickup mechanism and PF lift-up operation are the same way as that of the product). 5. The PF separation roller holds back any multiple-fed sheets and one sheet of media is fed into the product. (PF multiple-feed prevention mechanism is the same way as that of the product). Figure 1-31 1x500-sheet paper feeder block diagram Feed motor M101 SL1600 PF feed roller 1 PF feed roller PS1602 PS1601 PS1603 PS1600 SW1600 Lifter PF separation roller PF pickup roller Pickup arm M1600 Lifting plate Description 42 Signal Driver PF lifter motor M1600 PF LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal PF driver PF media presence sensor PS1600 PF MEDIA PRESENCE signal PF driver Paper feeder media stack surface sensor 1 PS1601 PF MEDIA STACK SENSOR 1 signal PF driver Paper feeder media stack surface sensor 2 PS1602 PF MEDIA STACK SENSOR 2 signal PF driver Paper feeder media path sensor PS1603 PF MEDIA PATH signal PF driver Paper feeder pickup solenoid SL1600 PF PICKUP SOLENOID signal PF driver Paper feeder media size switch SW1600 PF MEDIA SIZE signal PF driver Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Cassette lift operation (PF) The lift-up operation keeps the stack surface of media in the paper feeder cassette at a specified position to perform stable pickup operation. The paper feeder driver drives the PF lifter motor (M1600) to move up the lifter plate in which media is stacked. The cassette lift-up operation for the paper feeder is operated in the same way as that of the product base. The paper feeder driver monitors the PF media stack surface sensors (PS1601, PS1602) when the product is turned on, when the PF cassette is installed or during a print operation to perform the lift-up operation. Cassette lift operation (PF) 1. Initial lift-up operation The initial lift-up operation is performed if either one of the PF media stack surface sensors (PS1601,PS1602) does not detect the media surface when the power is turned on or when the PF cassette is installed. The paper feeder driver drives the PF lifter motor for a specified period after both of the PF stack surface sensors detect media and lifts the stack surface tot he pickup position. The paper feeder driver determines a PF lifter motor failure and notifies the DC controller if both of the PF media stack surface sensors do not detect media within a specified period from when a lift-up operation is started. 2. During print lift-up operation The during print lift-up operation is performed when the media surface is lowered for a specified level due to a pickup operation. The paper feeder driver drives the PF lifter motor for a specified period and lifts the stack surface to the pickup position when the PF media stack surface 1 (PS1601) detects media absence during a print operation. Cassette media size detection and cassette presence detection (PF) The cassette media size and cassette presence for the paper feeder are detected in the same way as that of the product base. Cassette multiple-feed prevention (PF) The cassette multiple-feed prevention for the paper feeder is operated in the same way as that of the product base. Jam detection (PF) The paper jam for the paper feeder is detected by the DC controller of the product base. ENWW 1x500-sheet paper feeder 43 1x1500-sheet paper deck The 1x1500-sheet paper feeder (PD) is optionally installed at the bottom of the product. It features paper pickup and paper feeding to the product. The prroduct supports one paper deck and up to three paper feeders between the product and the paper deck. Figure 1-32 1x500-sheet paper feeder Face-down delivery Face-up delivery The paper deck driver controls the operational sequence of the paper deck and the serial communication with the DC controller of the product. The DC controller sends several commands to the paper deck driver at necessary timing. The paper deck driver drives each load, such as motor and solenoid, according to the commands. The paper deck driver responds the status information of the paper deck to the DC controller. The DC controller determines a paper deck illegal connection and notifies the formatter if it does not make the serial communication with the paper deck driver during the pre-rotation period when the product is turned on, when recovering from the sleep mode or when the door is closed. The product supplies DC24V to the paper deck. The DC3.3V for sensors and ICs is generated from the DC24V in the paper deck driver. 44 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1-33 1x500-sheet paper feeder circuit diagram Paper deck +3.3V +24V M +3.3V generation circuit Motor Solenoid +24V DC controller/ Paper feeder driver Switch Sensor Paper deck driver Component Description Motor M1700 Paper deck lift motor Sensor PS1700 Paper deck media presence sensor PS1701 Paper deck media stack surface sensor 1 PS1702 Paper deck media stack surface sensor 2 PS1703 Door open detection sensor PS1704 Paper deck media path sensor Solenoid SL1700 Paper deck pickup solenoid Switch SW1700 Paper deck media size switch Pickup-and-feed operation (PD) The paper deck uses same mechanism of the product for the pickup-and-feed operation. The rollers used in the paper feeder are driven by the feed motor (M101) of the product through the gears. Pickup and feed sequence of operation (PD) ENWW 1. The lifter plate moves up to the position where the paper can be picked up after the product is turned on or the PD front door is closed. 2. The DC controller drives the feed motor (M101) when it receives a print command from the formatter. 3. The DC controller outputs a pickup command to the paper deck driver. 1x1500-sheet paper deck 45 4. The paper deck driver turns on the PD pickup solenoid (SL1700) when it receives a pickup command. Accordingly the PD pickup roller, PD feed roller and PD feed roller 1 rotate to pick up media in the paper deck. (PD pickup mechanism is the same way as that of the product). 5. The PD separation roller holds back any multiple-fed sheets and one sheet of media is fed in to the product. (PD multiple-feed prevention mechanism is the same way as that of the product). NOTE: The paper deck media size switch (SW1700) detects a media size in the paper deck. Figure 1-34 1x1500-sheet paper deck block diagram M101 SL1700 PD feed roller 1 PD feed roller PD pickup roller PS1702 PS1701 PS1700 SW1700 PS1704 PD separation roller PS1703 Pickup arm M1700 Lifter plate Description 46 Signal Driver PD lifter motor M1700 PD LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal PD driver PD media presence sensor PS1700 PD MEDIA PRESENCE signal PD driver PD media stack surface sensor 1 PS1701 PD MEDIA STACK SENSOR 1 signal PD driver Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Description Signal Driver PD media stack surface sensor 2 PS1702 PD MEDIA STACK SENSOR 2 signal PD driver PD door open detection sensor PS1703 PD DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal PD driver PD media path sensor PS1704 PF MEDIA PATH signal PD driver PD pickup solenoid SL1700 PF PICKUP SOLENOID signal PD driver PD media size switch SW1700 PF MEDIA SIZE signal PD driver Cassette lift operation (PD) The lift-up operation keeps the stack surface of media in the paper deck at a specified position to perform stable pickup operation. The paper deck driver drives the PD lifter motor (M1700) to move up the lifter plate in which media is stacked. The PD lifter motor uses four pulleys to wind the wire cables and two wire cables lift the lifter plate. When the PD front door is opened, the pulley gears and the motor gear are disengaged and the lifter plate lowers under its own weight. The paper deck driver monitors the PD media stack surface sensors (PS1701, PS1702) when the product is turned on, when the PD front door is closed or during a print operation to perform the lift-up operation. Lift operation (PD) 1. Initial lift-up operation The initial lift-up operation is performed if either one of the PD media stack surface sensors (PS1701,PS1702) does not detect the media surface when the power is turned on or when the PD front door is closed. The paper deck driver drives the PD lifter motor for a specified period after both of the PD media stack surface sensors detect media and lifts the stack surface to the pickup position. The paper deck driver determines a paper deck lifter motor failure and notifies the DC controller if both of the PD media stack surface sensors do not detect media within a specified period from when a lift-up operation is started. 2. During print lift-up operation The during print lift-up operation is performed when the media surface is lowered for a specified level due to a pickup operation. The paper deck driver drives the PD lifter motor for ENWW 1x1500-sheet paper deck 47 a specified period and lifts the stack surface to the pickup position when the PD media stack surface sensor 1 (PS1701)detects media absence during a print operation. 3. Pickup retry lift-up operation The pickup retry lift-up operation is performed when the first pickup retry is failed to pick up media. The paper deck driver drives the PD lifter motor for a specified period to lift the stack surface and performs second pickup retry. Figure 1-35 1x1500-sheet paper deck lift Wire cable Pulley Lifter plate Direction of the lifter plate moves up Direction of the lifter plate lowers under its own weight Media size detection (PD) The combination of the switches for the paper deck media size detection differs from the product cassette. Multiple-feed prevention (PD) The multiple-feed prevention for the paper deck is operated in the same way as that of the product. Jam detection (PF) The paper jam for the paper deck is detected by the DC controller of the product. 48 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Envelope feeder The envelope feeder (EF) is optionally installed on Tray 1, front side of the product. It features envelope pickup and envelope feed to the product. Figure 1-36 Envelope feeder The envelope feeder driver controls the operational sequence of the envelope feeder and the serial communication with the DC controller of the product. The DC controller sends several commands to the envelope feeder driver at necessary timing. The envelope feeder driver drives the motor according to the commands. The envelope feeder driver responds the status information of the envelope feeder to the DC controller. The product supplies DC24V to the envelope feeder. The DC3.3V for sensors and ICs is generated from the DC24V in the envelope feeder driver. Figure 1-37 Envelope feeder circuit diagram Envelope feeder +3.3V +24V +3.3V generation circuit M Motor +24V DC controller Sensor Envelope feeder driver Component Motor ENWW Description M1800 Envelope pickup motor Envelope feeder 49 Component Sensor Description PS1800 Envelope presence sensor PS1802 Envelope multiple feed sensor Pickup-and-feed operation (EF) The envelope in the envelope feeder is fed into the product individually. Pickup and feed sequence of operation (EF) 1. The envelope feeder driver drives the envelope pickup motor (M1800) when it receives a pickup command from the DC controller. Accordingly the envelope pickup roller, upper separation roller and lower separation roller rotate to pick up envelope. 2. The upper separation roller and lower separation roller remove any multiple-fed envelopes and one envelope is fed into the product. Figure 1-38 Envelope feeder diagram M1800 Upper separation roller Torque limiter Feed roller PS1802 PS1800 Envelope pickup roller Lower separation roller Description Signal Driver EF pickup motor M1800 ENVELOPE PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE signal EF driver EF media presence sensor PS1800 ENVELOPE PRESENCE signal EF driver EF multi feed sensor PS1802 ENVELOPE MULTI FEED signal EF driver Multiple-feed prevention (EF) The multiple-feed prevention for the envelope feeder is operated in the same way as that of the product. 50 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Multiple-feed detection (EF) The envelope feeder detects the multiple-feed of the envelopes to prevent the product damage from massive multiple-feed. The envelope feeder driver monitors the envelope multiple-feed sensor (PS1802) to detect up and down motion of the upper separation roller. During a normal-feed operation, the envelope multiple-feed sensor flag interrupts the multiple-feed sensor. If more than four multiple-fed envelopes are placed between the upper separation roller and the lower separation roller, the upper separation roller rises approximately 0.7mm (almost equivalent to the thickness of four envelopes). This causes the multiple-feed sensor flag not interrupting the sensor and the envelope feeder driver detects the multiple-feed of envelopes. NOTE: The multiple-feed detection mechanism is not able to detect less than four multiple-fed envelopes (approximately 0.7 mm), however, it does not affect the product damage. The envelope feeder driver notifies the pickup jam to the DC controller when it determines a multiple feed. Figure 1-39 Envelope feeder multiple-feed detection Envelope multiple-feed sensor (PS1802) Upper separation roller Envelope multiple-feed sensor flag Lower separation roller Multiple-fed envelope Jam detection (EF) The envelope feeder uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed ENWW Envelope feeder 51 jam detection sensors (EF) ● PS1802: Envelope multiple-feed sensor ● PS103: Top of page sensor (in the product) Figure 1-40 Envelope feeder jam detection PS1802 PS103 The envelope feeder driver determines a jam if the sensor detects envelope presence at a specified timing stored in the envelope feeder driver. The envelope feeder driver stops a print operation and notifies the DC controller when it determines a jam has occurred. Envelope feeder pickup delay jam ● The top of page sensor (PS103) does not detect the leading edge of envelope within a specified period from when a envelope pickup operation starts. Envelope feeder multiple-feed jam ● 52 The envelope multiple-feed sensor (PS1802) detects the multiple-fed envelopes after a pickup operation has started. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Duplexer The duplexer (DP) is installed at the back of the product. It features media reverse and media feed to the prroduct to print two sides of media. Figure 1-41 Duplexer Face-down delivery Duplex print The duplex driver controls the operational sequence of the duplexer and the serial communication with the DC controller of the product. The DC controller sends several commands to the duplex driver at necessary timing. The duplex driver drives the duplex reverse motor and the duplex re-pickup motor according to the commands. The duplex driver monitors the sensors and responds the status information of the duplexer to the DC controller. The printer supplies DC24V to the duplexer. The DC5V for sensors and ICs is generated from the DC24V in the duplex driver. ENWW Duplexer 53 Figure 1-42 Duplexer circuit diagram Duplexer +5V +24V M Motor +5V generation circuit Fan +24V DC controller Sensor Duplex driver Component Description Fan FM1501 Duplex cooling fan Motor M1501 Duplex reverse motor M1502 Duplex re-pick motor PS1501 Face up sensor PS1502 Duplex re-pick sensor PS1503 Side registration home-position sensor Sensor Motor and fan control (DP) The duplexer has two motors and a fan. The motors are used for the media feeding and the fan is used for preventing a temperature rising inside the duplex unit. NOTE: The paper deck media size switch (SW1700) detects a media size in the paper deck. Table 1-6 Fan (DP) Description Duplex cooling fan FM1501 Cooling area Type Speed Inside of the duplexer Intake Full Component driven Type Failure detection Table 1-7 Motors (DP) Description 54 Duplex reverse m0tor M1501 Face-down delivery roller (in the product) Stepping motor No Duplex re-pick motor M1502 Side registration guide, duplex feed roller Stepping motor No Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Failure detection (DP) The duplex driver determines a fan failure and notifies the DC controller when the fan locks for a specified period after the fan starts up. Reverse-and-re-pickup operation (DP) The duplexer has two motors: the duplex reverse motor (M1501) and the duplex re-pickup motor (M1502). The duplex driver controls forward and reverse the duplex re-pickup motor rotations. When the duplex re-pickup motor rotates, the rollers in the duplexer rotate and when it reverses, the side registration guide moves. The duplex reverse motor rotates or reverses the face-down delivery roller of the product. In addition, the duplexer has three photo interrupters: the face-up sensor (PS1501), duplex media repickup sensor (PS1502), and the side registration guide home-position sensor (PS1503). The face-up sensor is used for face-up tray open detection, the duplex media re-pickup sensor is used for jam detection, and the side registration guide home-position sensor is used for side registration guide homeposition detection. Reverse-and-re-pickup operation (DP) ENWW 1. The duplex driver reverses the duplex re-pickup motor (M1502) when it receives a side registration adjustment command from the DC controller. See Side registration adjustment operation (DP) on page 56. 2. The DC controller outputs a duplex reverse motor rotation command to the duplex driver after a specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor (PS700) of the product detects the leading edge of the page. 3. The duplex driver rotates the duplex reverse motor (M1501) and the page is fed to the face-down tray when the command is received. 4. The DC controller outputs a duplex reverse motor reverse command to the duplex driver after a specified period from when the fuser delivery sensor detects the trailing edge of a page. 5. The duplex driver reverses the duplex reverse motor and the page is fed to the duplexer along the side registration guide when the command is received. 6. The duplex driver rotates the duplex re-pickup motor after a specified period from when it reverses the duplex reverse motor. The media is fed by the oblique roller and the duplex feed rollers so that the edge contacts with the left plate to correct a skewed feed. 7. The duplex driver stops the duplex reverse motor after a specified period from when the DC controller reverses the duplex reverse motor. 8. The duplex driver stops the duplex re-pickup motor after a specified period from when the duplex media re-pickup sensor (PS1502) detects the leading edge of the page. Duplexer 55 9. The duplex driver rotates the duplex re-pickup motor when it receives a duplex re-pickup command from the DC controller. The page is fed to the pre-feed sensor (PS102) of the product at the same product feed speed. 10. The duplex driver stops duplex re-pickup motor after a specified period from when the duplex media re-pickup sensor detects the trailing edge of the page. The DC controller determines a print error and delivers media to the delivery tray without duplex printing if it encounters following conditions after the page is picked up for the first side printing. Figure 1-43 Duplexer block diagram Face-down delivery roller PS700 M1501 Duplex feed roller M1502 PS1501 CW CCW PS1503 PS1502 Side registration guide Description Signal Driver DP reverse motor M1501 DUPLEX REVERSE MOTOR DRIVE signal DP driver DP re-pick motor M1502 DUPLEX RE-PICK MOTOR signal DP driver Face-up sensor PS1501 FACE-UPsignal DP driver DP media re-pick sensor PS1502 DUPLEX MEDIA RE-PICK signal DP driver Side registration guide home-position sensor PS1503 SIDE REGISTRATION GUIDE HOMEPOSITION signal DP driver Side registration adjustment operation (DP) The product adjusts the side registration during a duplex print operation to align the center of the horizontal scanning on the second side with that of the print area on the photosensitive drum. 56 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The side registration adjustment is made by moving the side registration guide to the designated page size of the side registration adjustment command. The side registration guide moves to the following five positions depending on the media size in order of numbers 1 to 5 and then back to 1. 1. Letter or Legal (home position) 2. A4 3. Executive 4. B5 5. A5 Figure 1-44 Side registration adjustment operation (DP) home-position sensor ENWW Duplexer 57 The sequence of the side registration adjustment operation is as follows: 1. The duplex driver reverses the duplex re-pickup motor (M1502) when it receives a side registration adjustment command from the DC controller. 2. The side registration guide drive cam rotates and the side registration guide home-position sensor (PS1503) detects the home position of the side registration guide. Then the side registration guide moves depending on the media size. 3. The duplex driver stops the duplex re-pickup motor and completes the side registration guide movement. The duplex driver determines a side registration guide failure and notifies the DC controller when the side registration guide home-position sensor does not detect the home position after the side registration guide drive cam rotates twice. Jam detection (DP) he duplex unit uses the duplex media re-pickup sensor (PS1502) to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed. Figure 1-45 Jam detection (DP) PS1502 The duplexer determines a jam if the sensor detects media presence at a specified timing stored in the duplex driver. The duplex driver stops a print operation and notifies the DC controller when it determines a jam has occurred. Duplex media reverse delay jam ● The duplex media re-pickup sensor (PS1502) does not detect the leading edge of media within a specified period from when the duplex reverse motor starts reverse rotation. Duplex media re-pickup stationary jam ● 58 The duplex media re-pickup sensor (PS1502) does not detect the trailing edge of media within a specified period from when the re-pickup operation starts. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 2 Removal and replacement ● Introduction ● Removal and replacement strategy ● Electrostatic discharge ● Required tools ● Types of screws ● Service approach ● Customer replaceable units (CRUs) ● Covers ● Main assemblies ● 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) NOTE: Your product might not appear exactly as the one shown in the photos in this chapter. Although details such as the color of the external panels and covers might be different than your product, the procedures in this chapter are appropriate for your product. ENWW 59 Introduction This chapter describes the removal and replacement of field-replaceable units (FRUs) only. Replacing FRUs is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, notes and tips are included to provide directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures. HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level. Note the length, diameter, color, type, and location of each screw. Be sure to return each screw to its original location during reassembly. Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can become damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to find. When replacing wire harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides and retainers. Removal and replacement strategy WARNING! Turn the product off, wait 5 seconds, and then remove the power cord before attempting to service the product. If this warning is not followed, severe injury can result, in addition to damage to the product. The power must be on for certain functional checks during troubleshooting. However, disconnect the power supply during parts removal. Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful when handling sheet-metal parts. CAUTION: Do not bend or fold the flat flexible cables (FFCs) during removal or installation. Also, do not straighten pre-folds in the FFCs. You must fully seat all FFCs in their connectors. Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA. NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly. TIP: For clarity, some photos in this chapter show components removed that would not be removed to service the product. If necessary, remove the components listed at the beginning of a procedure before proceeding to service the product. Electrostatic discharge CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when removing product parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap. If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the product. 60 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Required tools ● #2 Phillips screwdriver with a magnetic tip and a 152-mm (6-inch) shaft length ● Small flat blade screwdriver ● Needle-nose pliers ● ESD mat or ESD strap (if one is available) ● Penlight (optional) CAUTION: Always use a Phillips screwdriver (callout 1). Do not use a Pozidriv screwdriver (callout 2) or any motorized screwdriver. These can damage screws or screw threads. Figure 2-1 Phillips and Pozidriv screwdriver comparison ENWW Required tools 61 Types of screws This table describes the screws that are used in the product and provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material that is being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one in its original location. WARNING! Make sure that components are replaced with the correct screw type. Using the incorrect screw (for example, substituting a long screw for the correct shorter screw) can cause damage to the product or interfere with product operation. Do not intermix screws that are removed with one component with the screws that are removed from another component. TIP: When you are disassembling the product, place the screws into the chassis holes from which they were removed. This prevents their loss, and ensures that the proper type and length of screw for each location is used when the product is reassembled. Table 2-1 Common fasteners used in this product Screw type Purpose This screw is used to fasten metal to metal when good electrical contact is needed. This screw also provides high resistance to loosening. Phillips-head machine screw with captive star washer This screw is used to fasten sheet metal or plastic to plastic frames (the deep, coarsely spaced threads provide an increased holding capability while decreasing the possibility of stripping the target hole). Phillips-head screw with self-tapping threads Reinstallation note: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it. You will feel resistance and hear the screw click when it engages the existing threads in the hole. Do not overtighten the screw. If a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly. This screw is used to fasten sheet metal parts to the sheet-metal chassis. It spans large clearance holes and distributes the load by increasing the bearing surface. Phillips washer-head machine screw with a broad, flat washer attached to the screw head 12 mm 62 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement Screw measurement guide ENWW Service approach Before performing service ● Remove all media from the product. ● Turn off the power using the power button. ● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables. ● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part. ● Remove the print cartridge. See Print cartridge on page 64. ● Remove the tray cassette or cassettes. After performing service ● Connect the interface cables, and then plug in the power cable. ● Reinstall the print cartridge. ● Reinstall the tray cassette or cassettes. ● If the 500-sheet paper feeder(s) or optional 1500-sheet paper deck was removed for service, place the product on the feeder(s) or deck. If applicable, engage the feeder or deck locks to secure the feeder(s) or deck to the product. Post-service test Perform the following test to verify that the repair or replacement was successful. Print-quality test ENWW 1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps. 2. Make sure that the tray or trays contains clean, unmarked paper. 3. Verify that the power cord and interface cable or interface cables are correctly connected, and then turn on the product. 4. Verify that the expected startup sounds occur. 5. Print a configuration page, and verify that the expected printing sounds occur. 6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations. 7. If necessary, restore any customer-specified settings. 8. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth. Service approach 63 Customer replaceable units (CRUs) Print cartridge 1. Open the print-cartridge door. Figure 2-2 Remove the print cartridge (1 of 2) 2. Firmly grasp the print cartridge and pull it up and out of the product. CAUTION: Do not expose the print cartridge to bright light or direct sunlight for long periods of time. This can damage the cartridge, which will result in print-quality defects. If the cartridge must be removed from the product for an extended amount of time, cover it and keep it out of bright light or direct sunlight. Figure 2-3 Remove the print cartridge (2 of 2) 64 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 2 Pull the tray out, slightly lift up, and then pull it completely out of the product to remove it. Figure 2-4 Remove Tray 2 ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 65 Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers CAUTION: When handling the rollers, avoid touching the roller surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. 1. Remove Tray 2 and place it on a level work surface. Locate and open the spring-loaded cover that is next to the roller in Tray 2. CAUTION: When you install this roller, make sure that it locks into place. Verify that the roller is correctly oriented, and that the torque limiter next to the roller is correctly positioned against the locking pin on the shaft. Figure 2-5 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (1 of 4) 2. Pinch the blue tab that is on the left side of the roller. Slide the roller off of the shaft. Figure 2-6 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (2 of 4) 66 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Move the front of the product to the edge of the work surface for better access to the remaining pickup and feed rollers. To find the rollers, look up into the inside of the opening that was created when you removed Tray 2. WARNING! Do not allow the front of the product to extend beyond the edge of the work surface. The product can become unbalanced and fall, which can cause damage to the product or personal injury to the service technician. Figure 2-7 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (3 of 4) ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 67 4. Pinch the locking tab on the left side of the feed roller (the front top roller below). Slide the roller off of the shaft. Repeat this step for the pickup roller (the bottom roller below). Reinstallation tip You might have to rotate the roller to gain access to the locking tab. NOTE: When you install these rollers, make sure that the rollers lock into place on the tabs that are on the drive gears. Figure 2-8 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (4 of 4) 68 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Transfer roller CAUTION: Do not touch the black rubber on the roller. Skin oils on the roller can cause print-quality problems. The use of disposable gloves is recommended when you remove the transfer roller. 1. Open the front cover. NOTE: If the print cartridge was not removed prior to servicing the prodcut, remove it now. 2. Use a transfer-roller removal hook (callout 1) to lift the left end of the metal shaft out of place near the blue gear (callout 2). If a removal hook is not available use a flatblade screwdriver. Slide the transfer roller to the left to remove it. CAUTION: out. Be careful to release and lift the left side of the roller first, and then slide the roller NOTE: The transfer-roller removal hook is included with a transfer-roller replacement kit. Figure 2-9 Remove the transfer roller Reinstallation tip When you install the transfer roller, make sure that the black collar on the left side is oriented correctly, with the open end face-down (the solid end is face-up). ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 69 Fuser WARNING! The fuser might be very hot. After turning off the product power, allow the fuser to cool for at least 5 minutes before removing it. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 87. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. Remove the fuser 1. Squeeze the blue fuser-release tabs (callout 1). Figure 2-10 Remove the fuser (1 of 2) 1 70 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Pull the fuser straight back and out of the product. CAUTION: Do not drop or jar the fuser. It can easily be damaged if it is mishandled. TIP: When you replace the fuser, make sure that it is fully seated into the product. You should hear both sides snap into place. Figure 2-11 Remove the fuser (2 of 2) Formatter cover and formatter cage 1. Grasp the formatter cover. 2. Pull the cover straight back and away from the product. Figure 2-12 Remove the formatter cover and formatter cage (1 of 3) ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 71 3. Remove two thumb screws (callout 1) Figure 2-13 Remove the formatter cover and formatter cage (2 of 3) 1 4. Carefully slide the formatter cage away from the product to remove it. NOTE: If you installing a replacement formatter, transfer the hard drive and memory DIMM (if installed) to the replacement formatter. See Hard drive on page 74 and Memory DIMM on page 80. Figure 2-14 Remove the formatter cover and formatter cage (3 of 3) 72 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Installing a new formatter CAUTION: Do not replace the DC controller and the formatter at the same time. 1. Install the hard drive and memory DIMM from the discard formatter on the replacement formatter. 2. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. ENWW 3. Turn the product off. 4. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 5. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 73 Hard drive A solid state module (SSM) or a crypto hard-disk drive (HDD) device is installed depending on the product model. CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. Remove the SSM 1. Open the formatter cage door, and then disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-15 Remove the SSM (1 of 3) 1 74 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the SSM toward the hinge side of the door. TIP: It might be easier to remove the SSM if you separate the formatter cage door from the cage. Slide the door toward the top of the cage, and then separate the components. Figure 2-16 Remove the SSM (2 of 3) 2 3. Remove the SSM from the cage door. NOTE: Slide the SSM out of the mounting cradle to separate the components. Do not lose the cradle while handling the SSM. Reinstallation tip Use the cradle to install a replacement SSM. After installing a replacement hard drive, you must reload the firmware by performing a firmware upgrade. See Installing a replacement hard drive on page 78. Figure 2-17 Remove the SSM (3 of 3) ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 75 Remove the encrypted HHD 1. Open the formatter cage door, and then disconnect two connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-18 Remove the encrypted HHD (1 of 4) 1 2. Release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the HHD toward the hinge side of the door. TIP: It might be easier to remove the HHD if you separate the formatter cage door from the cage. Slide the door toward the top of the cage, and then separate the components. Figure 2-19 Remove the encrypted HHD (2 of 4) 2 76 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove the HHD from the cage door. NOTE: The HHD rails (callout 3) are not captive and can be easily separated from the component. Do not lose the rails while handling the HHD. Figure 2-20 Remove the encrypted HHD (3 of 4) 3 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 4), and then remove the HHD mounting rails. Do not lose the rails while handling the HDD. Reinstallation tip Use the rails to install a replacement HDD. After installing a replacement hard drive, you must reload the firmware by performing a firmware upgrade. See Installing a replacement hard drive on page 78. Figure 2-21 Remove the encrypted HHD (4 of 4) 4 ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 77 Installing a replacement hard drive After installing a replacement hard drive, you must reload the firmware by performing a firmware upgrade. Perform a firmware upgrade 1. Go to www.hp.com/support/lj600Series and follow the on screen steps to download the most recent firmware upgrade files for this product. 2. Copy the firmware upgrade file to the root directory of a USB storage accessory. The firmware upgrade file has a .bdl extension. NOTE: Use a standard USB storage accessory that uses File Allocation Table (FAT) file systems and that does not have a CD-ROM partition. 3. Insert the USB storage accessory into the USB port on the bottom edge of the control panel. 4. SSM: see SSM firmware upgrade on page 78. -orHDD: see HDD firmware upgrade on page 79. SSM firmware upgrade 1. Turn the product on. The message Error 99.09.67 Disk Not Bootable appears on the control-panel display. Press the OK button to continue. 2. Wait for the Preboot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then press the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator. Press the OK button to select it. 3. Press the down arrow button to scroll to Download. Press the OK button to select it. 4. Press the down arrow button to scroll to USB Thumbdrive. Press the OK to select it. 5. Several .bdl files might be listed. Press the down arrow button to scroll to the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded earlier. Press the OK button to select it. NOTE: If no .bdl fils are listed, try saving the file to a different USB storage accessory. 6. Wait while the file transfers. When the transfer is complete, the message Complete appears on the screen. 7. Turn the product off, remove the USB storage accessory, and then turn the product on. Wait for several minutes while the product initializes. NOTE: If the upgrade is unsuccessful, try sending the firmware upgrade file again. 78 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW HDD firmware upgrade 1. Turn the product on. The message Error 99.09.63 Incorrect Disk appears on the controlpanel display. Press the OK button to continue. 2. Wait for the Preboot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then press the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator. Press the OK button to select it. 3. Press the down arrow button to scroll to Manage Disk. Press the OK button to select it. 4. Press the down arrow button to scroll to Clear Disk Pass. Press the OK button to select it. 5. The message Proceed With Requested Action appears. Press the OK button to select it. 6. Press the # button to return to the Preboot home menu screen. 7. Press the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator. Press the OK button to select it. 8. Press the down arrow button to scroll to Download. Press the OK button to select it. 9. Press the down arrow button to scroll to USB Thumbdrive. Press the OK button to select it. 10. Several .bdl files might be listed. Press the down arrow button to scroll to the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded earlier. Press the OK button to select it. NOTE: If no .bdl fils are listed, try saving the file to a different USB storage accessory. 11. Wait while the file transfers. When the transfer is complete, the message Complete appears on the screen. 12. Turn the product off, remove the USB storage accessory, and then turn the product on. Wait for several minutes while the product initializes. NOTE: If the upgrade is unsuccessful, try sending the firmware upgrade file again. ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 79 Memory DIMM CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. NOTE: Depending on the model, a memory DIMM might not be installed. To increase the product memory, install a memory DIMM. See Install the memory DIMM on page 81. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. Remove the memory DIMM 1. Open the formatter cage door. 2. Push the DIMM-locking arms away from the DIMM to release it, and then pull the DIMM out of the DIMM slot. Figure 2-22 Remove the memory DIMM 80 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Install the memory DIMM CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. Turn the product off. Disconnect the power cord and interface cables. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Formatter cover. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. 1. Open the formatter cage door. 2. Remove the DIMM from the antistatic packadge. 3. Hold the DIMM by the edges, and align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open.) Figure 2-23 Install the memory DIMM (1 of 2) 4. Press the DIMM straight into the slot, and press firmly. Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap into place. Figure 2-24 Install the memory DIMM (2 of 2) ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 81 Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers CAUTION: When handling the rollers, avoid touching the roller surfaces. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. The Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers are also user-replaceable components. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1) with a short screwdriver. Figure 2-25 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (1 of 4) 1 3. Push down on the roller-shaft bushing (callout 2) to release two alignment pins, and then slide the bushing to the left and off of the shaft to remove it. Figure 2-26 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (2 of 4) 2 82 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Slide the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers cover slightly to the left to release it, and then lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 2-27 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (3 of 4) ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 83 5. Slide the Tray 1 pickup roller (callout 3) and the feed roller (callout 4) to the left and off of the shafts to remove them. Figure 2-28 Remove the Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers (4 of 4) 3 4 TIP: The pickup roller must fit over the drive tabs (callout 5) on the roller-drive gear (callout 6). 5 84 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 6 ENWW Tray 1 separation roller CAUTION: When handling the roller, avoid touching the roller surface. Skin oils and fingerprints on a roller surface can cause print-quality problems. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Rotate the spring-loaded cover downward to gain access to the roller. Figure 2-29 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (1 of 3) 3. Slide the separation roller (callout 1) to the left to remove it. Figure 2-30 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (2 of 3) 1 ENWW Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 85 4. Remove the roller. Figure 2-31 Remove the Tray 1 separation roller (3 of 3) 86 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear output bin NOTE: If the duplexer is installed, lift it up slightly and pull it away from the product to remove it. 1. Open the rear output bin. 2. Squeeze the hinge pin out of its mounting hole. Figure 2-32 Remove the rear output bin (1 of 2) 3. Rotate the output bin away from the product until the right hinge pin is released, and then remove the output bin. Figure 2-33 Remove the rear output bin (2 of 2) 1 ENWW 2 Customer replaceable units (CRUs) 87 Covers Top-accessory cover Lift the top-accessory cover up and off the product. Figure 2-34 Remove the top-accessory cover 88 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Envelope feed accessory covers 1. Open the front cover. Grasp the inner front accessory cover, and then pull it straight out of the product. Figure 2-35 Remove the front accessory covers (1 of 2) 2. Rotate the top of the front accessory receptacle cover away from the product, and then pull it straight away from the product to remove it. Figure 2-36 Remove the front accessory covers (2 of 2) ENWW Covers 89 Duplex accessory or cover Pull the duplex accessory or cover out, slightly lift up, and then pull it completely out of the product to remove it. Figure 2-37 Remove the duplex accessory cover Figure 2-38 Remove the duplex accessory 90 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 2 extension door Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Duplex accessory, or the duplex accessory cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. Remove the Tray 2 extension door 1. Carefully flex the Tray 2 extension door to release the hinge pin near the power cord side of the product. Figure 2-39 Remove the Tray 2 extension door (1 of 2) 2. Rotate the Tray 2 extension door to the horizontal position, and then pull up on the keyed hinge pin to release the door. Remove the Tray 2 extension door Figure 2-40 Remove the Tray 2 extension door (2 of 2) ENWW Covers 91 Top cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. Remove the top cover NOTE: If the optional stapler/stacker or stacker accessory is installed, lift it straight up and off of the product to remove it. Then proceed to step 2. 1. Open the rear-output bin, the print-cartridge door, and the front cover. 2. Use needle-nose pliers to release the print-cartridge drive-arm tab (callout 1). CAUTION: The print-cartridge drive-arm tab is easily broken. TIP: Push the print-cartridge drive-arm (callout 2) back into the product to avoid damaging it when you remove the top cover. Figure 2-41 Remove the top cover (1 of 4) 1 2 92 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove four screws (callout 3). Figure 2-42 Remove the top cover (2 of 4) 3 4. Partially close the print-cartridge door, and then use a small flat blade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 4). NOTE: Make sure that these tabs are fully seated when the top cover is reinstalled. Figure 2-43 Remove the top cover (3 of 4) 4 ENWW Covers 93 5. Lift the top cover up and off of the product to remove it. CAUTION: The accessory pin (located in the left-rear corner of the cover) is not captive. Do not lose the pin. Figure 2-44 Remove the top cover (4 of 4) 94 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Right-side cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. Remove the right-side cover 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). TIP: Look for the arrows embossed into the cover to locate the tab. Figure 2-45 Remove the right-side cover (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Covers 95 2. Carefully separate the cover from the product near the control panel. Figure 2-46 Remove the right-side cover (2 of 3) 3. Rotate the top of the cover away from the product, and then and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 2-47 Remove the right-side cover (3 of 3) 96 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstall the right cover ▲ If you are installing a replacement cover, remove the engine-test button (callout 1) from the discarded cover and then install it on the replacement cover. Figure 2-48 Install the right cover 1 ENWW Covers 97 Left-side cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. NOTE: If Tray 2 was not removed prior to servicing the prodcut, remove it now. ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. Remove the left-side cover 1. Gently pry the front-cover retainers off of the Tray 1 arms. Figure 2-49 Remove the left-side cover (1 of 3) 98 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release two tabs (callout 3), and then rotate the top of the cover away from the product and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 2-50 Remove the left-side cover (2 of 3) 3 3. Rotate the top of the cover away from the product and lift the cover up to remove it. Figure 2-51 Remove the left-side cover (3 of 3) ENWW Covers 99 Right-front cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Walk-up USB cover, if installed. NOTE: This is the small dust cover that plugs into the walk-up USB port on the front of the product. ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the right-front cover 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 2-52 Remove the right-front cover (1 of 4) 1 100 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Gently pull the envelope-feeder connector cover (callout 2) off of the product to remove it. Figure 2-53 Remove the right-front cover (2 of 4) 2 4. Remove three screws (callout 3). Figure 2-54 Remove the right-front cover (3 of 4) 3 ENWW Covers 101 5. Remove the right front cover. Figure 2-55 Remove the right-front cover (4 of 4) 102 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear-upper cover Before proceeding, remove the following components::: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the rear-upper cover 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then rotate the cover toward the paper-delivery assembly to release it. Figure 2-56 Remove the rear-upper cover (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Covers 103 2. Remove the rear-upper cover Figure 2-57 Remove the rear-upper cover (2 of 2) 104 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Front cover Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 100. Remove the front cover 1. Gently pry the front-cover retainers off of the Tray 1 arms. Figure 2-58 Remove the front cover (1 of 2) ENWW Covers 105 2. Release one spring (callout 1), and then slide the front cover toward the right side of the product to remove it. Reinstallation tip Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to reinstall this spring. Figure 2-59 Remove the front cover (2 of 2) 1 106 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Main assemblies Registration assembly 1. Open the print-cartridge door, and then remove the print cartridge. 2. Use the green handle (located at the right edge of the registration plate) to raise the registrationroller plate, and then remove five screws (callout 1). Figure 2-60 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 4) 1 3. Locate the grounding plate at the right side of the registration assembly. The plate is not captive when you remove the assembly. Do not lose the grounding plate. Figure 2-61 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 4) ENWW Main assemblies 107 4. Lift the registration assembly out of the product. Figure 2-62 Remove the registration assembly (3 of 4) TIP: To reinstall the registration assembly, you must open the registration-roller plate to gain access to the mounting holes. Figure 2-63 Remove the registration assembly (4 of 4) 108 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Control-panel assembly CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the control-panel assembly 1. Remove three screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 2). Figure 2-64 Remove the control-panel assembly (1 of 2) 2 1 ENWW Main assemblies 109 2. Slightly move the control-panel assembly toward the right side of the product to release it, and then remove the assembly. Figure 2-65 Remove the control-panel assembly (2 of 2) 110 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Walk-up USB port and cable Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and formatter cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the walk-up USB port and cable 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cable from the retainers (callout 2). Figure 2-66 Remove the walk-up USB port and cable (1 of 4) 2 1 ENWW Main assemblies 111 2. Remove one screw (callout 3). Figure 2-67 Remove the walk-up USB port and cable (2 of 4) 3 3. Remove the USB port and cable assembly. TIP: You might need to push on the mounting tab that secures the USB port holder to the chassis —from the DC controller side of the product—to remove the assembly. Figure 2-68 Remove the walk-up USB port and cable (3 of 4) 112 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. If necessary, disconnect one connector (callout 4), remove one screw (callout 5), and then remove the walk-up port PCA (callout 6) from the mounting bracket. Figure 2-69 Remove the walk-up USB port and cable (4 of 4) 4 6 5 ENWW Main assemblies 113 Inner connecting PCA CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover, formatter cage, and formatter PCA. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the inner connecting PCA 1. Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), release the wire harness from the retainers (callout 2), disconnect one FFC (callout 3), and then remove two screws (callout 4). TIP: The PCA mounting screw is a shoulder type fastener. When the PCA is reinstalled, make sure that you use this screw to fasten the PCA to the chassis. Figure 2-70 Remove the inner connecting PCA (1 of 3) 4 1 3 2 114 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Release one tab (callout 5), lift up on the PCA to release it. Figure 2-71 Remove the inner connecting PCA (2 of 3) 5 3. Remove the inner connecting PCA. Figure 2-72 Remove the inner connecting PCA (3 of 3) ENWW Main assemblies 115 Reinstall the inner connecting PCA The back edge of the PCA—near the bottom of the formatter connector—must be correctly positioned in the mounting-bracket slot. Figure 2-73 Correctly installed inner connecting PCA Figure 2-74 Incorrectly installed inner connecting PCA 116 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Fan FN102 Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove fan FN102 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J79), and then release the wire harness from the retainer on the fan duct. TIP: It might be easier to release this wire harness if you partially release the fan duct from the chassis (release one tab near the motor). Figure 2-75 Remove fan FN102 (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Main assemblies 117 2. Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Connect the wire-harness connector to the DC controller before reinstalling the fan into the duct. Figure 2-76 Remove fan FN102 (2 of 2) 2 118 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Fan FN103 Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove fan FN103 1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1; J75), and then release the wire harness from the retainer on the fan duct. Figure 2-77 Remove fan FN103 (1 of 2) 1 ENWW Main assemblies 119 2. Release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 2-78 Remove fan FN103 (2 of 2) 2 120 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup-motor assembly (M101) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the pickup-motor assembly 1. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2). Figure 2-79 Remove the pickup motor (1 of 2) 2 1 ENWW Main assemblies 121 2. Roteat the motor assembly towards the front of the product to release it, and then remove it. Figure 2-80 Remove the pickup motor (2 of 2) Reinstallation tip Position the motor assembly on the product chassis, and then rotate it toward the back of the product to engage the tabs on the chassis with the assembly mounting bracket. 122 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Drum-motor assembly (M102) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the drum motor 1. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1), and the remove three screws (callout 2). Figure 2-81 Remove the drum motor (1 of 2) 1 2 ENWW Main assemblies 123 2. Rotate the motor assembly toward the front of the product to release it, and then remove it. Figure 2-82 Remove the drum motor (2 of 2) Reinstallation tip Position the motor assembly on the product chassis, and then rotate it toward the back of the product to engage the tabs on the chassis with the assembly mounting bracket. 124 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Lifter-motor assembly (M103) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the lifter motor 1. Disconnect one connector one wire-harness connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harness from two retainers (callout 2). Figure 2-83 Remove the lifter motor (1 of 4) 1 2 ENWW Main assemblies 125 2. Release one spring (callout 2). NOTE: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring. Figure 2-84 Remove the lifter motor (2 of 4) 3 3. Release the wire-harness retainer (callout 4), move the wire harness (callout 5) out of the way, and then remove one screw (callout 6). Figure 2-85 Remove the lifter motor (3 of 4) 5 4 6 126 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove the lifter-motor assembly. Figure 2-86 Remove the lifter motor (4 of 4) ENWW Main assemblies 127 DC controller PCA CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the DC controller PCA 1. Unplug all of the wire and cable connectors from the DC controller PCA. TIP: The DC controller shown below is only representational of the component found in this family of products. The component found in your specific product might look different than the one shown below. Figure 2-87 Remove the DC controller PCA (1 of 4) 128 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 1),release one tab (callout 2), and then carefully remove the DC controller PCA. CAUTION: Correct reinstallation of the DC controller is critical to correct operation of the product. If you are installing a new DC controller, follow the instructions in the reinstallation tips. If you are installing a new formatter and a new DC controller, see the special section that follows this DC controller section—Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller on page 129 . Figure 2-88 Remove the DC controller PCA (4 of 4) 1 2 Reinstallation tip NOTE: DC controller PCA connector location J80 is not used. There will not be a connector for this location when the DC controller PCA is reinstalled. 1. After installing a new DC controller, turn the product on and wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. 2. Turn the product off. 3. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 4. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. Installing a new formatter and a new DC controller CAUTION: Do not replace the DC controller and the formatter at the same time. ENWW 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the formatter (see Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71) and replace it with the new formatter. Main assemblies 129 3. Turn the product on and then wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. NOTE: Five minutes is required to allow for NVRAM settings to be written. The same five-minute wait is required several times during this procedure. 4. Turn the product off. 5. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 6. Turn the product off. 7. Remove the DC controller (see DC controller PCA on page 128) and replace it with the new DC controller. 8. Turn the product on and wait for five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 9. Turn the product off. 10. Turn the product on again, and then wait five minutes after the product reaches the Ready state. 11. Print a configuration page to verify against original settings. 130 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Pickup-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Pickup-motor assembly. See Pickup-motor assembly (M101) on page 121. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 128. TIP: The pickup-motor wire harness is disconnected from the motor assembly. Leave the wire harness connected to the DC controller PCA so it is not lost when the PCA is removed. Remove the pickup-drive assembly 1. Release the wire harnesses from the retainer (callout 1) located on the lifter-motor side of the pickup-drive assembly. Figure 2-89 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (1 of 8) 1 ENWW Main assemblies 131 2. Release the solenoid wire harness (callout 2) from the retainer (callout 3). TIP: Do not damage the wire harness when removing it from the retainer. It might be easier to remove all or the wire harnesses together to release the solenoid wire harness. Figure 2-90 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (2 of 8) 3 2 3. Remove five screws (callout 4). Figure 2-91 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (3 of 8) 4 132 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove one e-clip (callout 5). Figure 2-92 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (4 of 8) 5 5. Remove one shaft collar (callout 6). Figure 2-93 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (5 of 8) 6 ENWW Main assemblies 133 6. Push the tray drive-gear/shaft (located where the e-clip and shaft collar were removed in the previous steps) into the Tray 2 cavity. Figure 2-94 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (6 of 8) 7. Two gears located inside the assembly are not captive when the assembly is removed. Do not lose these gears when handling the assembly. If the gears are dislodged during removal, use the figure below to correctly reinstall them. TIP: The gears in the assembly have a special grease applied to them at the factory. Try not to remove this grease when handling the assembly. Figure 2-95 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (7 of 8) 134 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Reach inside the product and push the rear Tray 2 feed roller up into its raised position (this disengages the roller-lifting arm from the clutch gear), and then remove the pickup-drive assembly. Figure 2-96 Remove the pickup-drive assembly (8 of 8) ENWW Main assemblies 135 Reinstall the pickup-drive assembly When you reinstall the paper-delivery drive assembly gears and shaft, verify that the gears are seated on the shaft-locking bars and that the shaft collars are correctly positioned in the paper-pickup drivegear assembly mounting bracket and product chassis. Table 2-2 Pickup-drive assembly 136 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 1 Pickup drive unit 2 E-clip 3 Bushing 4 23T gear 5 Retard roller drive shaft ENWW Fuser-motor assembly (M299) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Inner connecting PCA. See Inner connecting PCA on page 114. NOTE: Do not completely remove the inner connecting PCA. Remove the mounting screws, and then move the PCA out of the way. ● DC controller. See DC controller PCA on page 128. Remove the fuser-motor assembly 1. Release one spring (callout 1). CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring. Figure 2-97 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (1 of 3) 1 ENWW Main assemblies 137 2. Remove two screws (callout 2) and then remove the guide (callout 3). Figure 2-98 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (2 of 3) 2 3 3. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 4), and then remove three screws (callout 5). Remove the fuser-motor assembly. Reinstallation tip Install the fuser-motor wire harness on the replacement fuser-motor assembly. Figure 2-99 Remove the fuser-motor assembly (3 of 3) 4 5 138 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Drum-drive assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Fan FN102. See Fan FN102 on page 117. ● Fan FN103. See Fan FN103 on page 119. ● Drum-motor assembly. See Drum-motor assembly (M102) on page 123. ● DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 128. Remove the drum-drive assembly 1. Remove one screw (callout 1) and the fan FN103 duct. Figure 2-100 Remove the drum-drive assembly (1 of 4) 1 ENWW Main assemblies 139 2. Release the wire-harnesses from the retainer on the fan FN102 duct (callout 2) . Figure 2-101 Remove the drum-drive assembly (2 of 4) 2 3. Remove three screws (callout 3). Figure 2-102 Remove the drum-drive assembly (3 of 4) 3 140 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Carefully remove the drum-drive assembly. Figure 2-103 Remove the drum-drive assembly (4 of 4) Reinstall the drum-drive assembly When the drum-drive assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly positioned in the assembly. Figure 2-104 Reinstall the drum-drive assembly ENWW Main assemblies 141 Fan FN101 Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. Remove fan FN101 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Figure 2-105 Remove fan FN101 (1 of 3) 2 1 142 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 3), and then remove one screw (callout 4). Slide the thermistor sensor bar (callout 5) to the right to release it, and then lift the thermistor sensor bar away from the product. Figure 2-106 Remove fan FN101 (2 of 3) 4 5 3 3. Release the two fan-locking tabs (callout 6), and then remove the fan. CAUTION: When you reinstall the fan, do not apply too much pressure to the wire-harness connectors when they are connected to the power supply. Applying too much pressure might snap off the soldered connectors on the power supply. Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 2-107 Remove fan FN101 (3 of 3) 6 ENWW Main assemblies 143 Fan FN301 before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. Remove fan FN301 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 2). Figure 2-108 Remove fan FN301 (1 of 3) 2 1 144 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then release the wire harness from the retainer (callout 4). Unhook and remove the fan clip (callout 5). Figure 2-109 Remove fan FN301 (2 of 3) 4 5 3 3. Release two tabs (callout 6), and then remove the fan. TIP: When you reinstall the fan, the air must flow into the product. Verify that the airflow arrows that are embossed on the fan body point into the product. Figure 2-110 Remove fan FN301 (3 of 3) 6 ENWW Main assemblies 145 Environmental sensor (TH3) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) 1. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 2). Figure 2-111 Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) (1 of 2) 2 1 146 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and then remove one screw (callout 4). Slide the thermistor sensor bar (callout 5) to the right to release it, and then lift the thermistor sensor bar away from the product. Figure 2-112 Remove the environmental sensor (TH3) (2 of 2) 4 5 3 ENWW Main assemblies 147 High voltage power supply CAUTION: ESD sensitive component. ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. ● Rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 87. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 70. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92 . ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then slide the power-supply PCA guide towards the rear of the product to remove it. Figure 2-113 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (1 of 7) 1 2 148 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove four screws (callout 3) and one grounding screw (callout 4). WARNING! When reinstalling the power supply, you must use a grounding screw to secure the AC outlet to the product chassis. Figure 2-114 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (2 of 7) 3 4 3. Disconnect five wire-harness connectors (callout 6; J82, J84, J85, J95, and J96). Figure 2-115 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (3 of 7) 6 ENWW Main assemblies 149 4. Remove two screws (product left side; callout 7) and then remove the fan-cover plate (callout 8). Figure 2-116 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (4 of 7) 8 7 5. Disconnect three wire-harness connectors (product left side; callout 9) and then remove four screws (callout 10). Figure 2-117 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (5 of 7) 10 9 150 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Feed the cables that were disconnected earlier through the hole in the right side of the chassis under the power-supply assembly. CAUTION: Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers on the feed-guide assembly (mounted to the top of the power supply) remain in place. These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them. Figure 2-118 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (6 of 7) 7. Grasp the power-supply assembly and lift it up slightly. Pull it straight out of the chassis. Figure 2-119 Remove the high-voltage power-supply assembly (7 of 7) ENWW Main assemblies 151 Feed-guide assembly Before proceeding, remove th following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. ● Fuser. See Fuser on page 70. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92 . ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. ● High-voltage power supply. See High voltage power supply on page 148. Remove the feed-guide assembly 1. Remove five screws (callout 1). Figure 2-120 Remove the feed-guide assembly (1 of 3) 1 152 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove one screw (callout 2). Figure 2-121 Remove the feed-guide assembly (2 of 3) 2 3. Remove the feed-guide assembly. Figure 2-122 Remove the feed-guide assembly (3 of 3) ENWW Main assemblies 153 Reinstall the feed-guide assembly When you reinstall the feed-guide assembly, make sure that the support foot is correctly positioned on the power supply. CAUTION: Make sure that the four rubber belts and plastic rollers on the feed-guide assembly (mounted to the top of the power supply) remain in place. These belts and rollers can easily become dislodged and you might lose them. Figure 2-123 Reinstall the feed-guide assembly 154 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. ● Right front cover. See Right-front cover on page 100. ● Front cover. See Front cover on page 105. Remove the Tray 1 pickup assembly 1. Disconnect two wire-harness connectors (callout 1; J71, and J81), and then release the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2). Figure 2-124 Remove the Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly (1 of 3) 2 1 ENWW Main assemblies 155 2. Remove eight screws (callout 3). NOTE: The four outside screws on the assembly are a different type than the others. Make sure that you replace the screws in the same position that they are removed from. Figure 2-125 Remove the Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly (2 of 3) 3 3 3. Rotate the left side of the assembly away from the chassis, and then slide the assembly to the left to remove it. Figure 2-126 Remove the Tray 1 pickup assembly (3 of 3) 1 156 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW Feed-roller assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Tray 2 extension door. See Tray 2 extension door on page 91. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Left-side cover. See Left-side cover on page 98. ● Right front cover. See Right-front cover on page 100. ● Front cover. See Front cover on page 105. ● Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly. See Tray 1 paper-pickup assembly on page 155. Remove the feed-roller assembly ▲ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the feed-roller assembly (callout 2). Figure 2-127 Remove the feed-roller assembly 1 2 ENWW Main assemblies 157 Laser/scanner assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Duplex accessory or cover. See Duplex accessory or cover on page 90. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71 ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. Remove the laser/scanner assembly 1. Unplug the laser/scanner wire-harness connector from the DC controller PCA (callout 1; J86). Figure 2-128 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (1 of 4) 1 158 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove the laser/scanner wire-harness from the wire guide (callout 2). Figure 2-129 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (2 of 4) 2 3. Remove four screws (callout 3) and the grounding clips. Figure 2-130 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (3 of 4) 3 ENWW Main assemblies 159 4. Disconnect the laser/scanner wire-harness (callout 4) from the laser/scanner PCA. Figure 2-131 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (4 of 4) 4 5. Carefully lift the laser/scanner up and out of the product. Make sure that the laser/scanner assembly does not catch or snag the wires along the bottom of the assembly when you remove the assembly. CAUTION: When you reinstall the laser/scanner assembly, make sure that the wire-harnesses are correctly routed through the cable guides. If the wire-harnesses are not correctly routed, they can be damaged when the top cover is installed. NOTE: Make sure that the air duct is correctly positioned and that the laser/scanner shutter properly functions. 160 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Paper-delivery assembly Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● Top accessory cover. See Top-accessory cover on page 88. ● Rear output bin. See Rear output bin on page 87. ● Formatter cover and cage. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 92. ● Right-side cover. See Right-side cover on page 95. ● Rear upper cover. See Rear-upper cover on page 103. Remove the paper-delivery assembly 1. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release two tabs (callout 2). Figure 2-132 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (1 of 4) 2 1 ENWW Main assemblies 161 2. Rotate the top of the guide away form the product, push up on the guide to release it, and then remove the guide. Figure 2-133 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (2 of 4) 1 1 2 162 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement 2 ENWW 3. Use a small flatblade screwdriver to release the locking pin on the shaft lock, and then rotate the lock counter clockwise until the inner retaining tab (gear side) aligns with the hole in the paperdelivery assembly frame. Slide the shaft lock to the right and remove it to release the gear shaft from the paper-delivery assembly. CAUTION: Do not break the shaft lock. A replacement is not provided with a new paperdelivery assembly. TIP: Snap the shaft lock back into place on the assembly so that you will not lose it. Remove the shaft lock when you reinstall the output-delivery assembly. When the paper-delivery assembly is installed, verify that the locking pin on the shaft lock is fully seated in the hole on the paperdelivery assembly. Figure 2-134 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (3 of 4) ENWW Main assemblies 163 4. Lift up the gear end of the output-delivery assembly slightly and slide the assembly toward the formatter assembly to remove it. CAUTION: The rear face-down output-bin-sensor cable is routed through a notch on the paperdelivery assembly at the gear end of the assembly. When you remove the assembly, carefully remove the cable from the notch to avoid damage to the cable. See Figure 2-136 Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly on page 164. Figure 2-135 Remove the paper-delivery assembly (4 of 4) Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly Make sure that the output-bin sensor is not dislodged when the paper-deliver assembly is reinstalled. Figure 2-136 Reinstall the paper-delivery assembly 164 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) NOTE: The removal steps for the pickup and feed rollers in the 1,500-sheet paper deck are the same as the removing the Tray 2 rollers. See Figure 2-7 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (3 of 4) on page 67 and Figure 2-8 Remove the Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers (4 of 4) on page 68 in Tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed rollers on page 66. Separation roller (PD) 1. Open the 1,500-sheet paper deck door, and then open the separation-roller cover. Figure 2-137 Remove the separation roller (PD; 1 of 2) ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 165 2. Pinch the blue latch that is on the side of the feed roller and slide the roller off of the shaft. Reinstallation tip When this roller is reinstalled, it must lock into place. Verify that the roller is seated on the locking bars that are located on the round black spacer and that the spacer is seated on the shaft-locking pin (callout 1 and callout 2). Figure 2-138 Remove separation roller (PD; 2 of 2) 1 166 2 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear cover (PD) 1. Release two tabs (callout 1). Figure 2-139 Remove the rear cover (PD; 1 of 2) 1 2. Rotate the top of the cover away from the feeder, and then lift up on the cover to release it. Remove the cover. Figure 2-140 Remove the rear cover (PD; 2 of 2) ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 167 Right-side cover (PD) 1. Remove the 1,500-sheet paper deck rear cover. See Rear cover (PD) on page 167. 2. Remove one screw (callout 1). Figure 2-141 Remove the right-side cover (PD; 1 of 2) 1 3. Rotate the top of the cover away from the chassis and then lift it up and remove it. Figure 2-142 Remove the right-side cover (PD; 2 of 2) 1 2 168 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck left-side cover Before proceeding, remove the following components; ● 1,500-sheet paper deck rear cover. See Rear cover (PD) on page 167. Remove the left-side cover 1. Before removing the lock-mechanism cover, take note of the location of the retainer tabs (callout 1). The retaining tabs on this cover can be easily broken. Figure 2-143 Remove the left-side cover (PD; 1 of 5) 1 ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 169 2. Slightly pry up on the lock-mechanism cover, and then slide it toward the front of the paper deck to release it. Remove the cover. CAUTION: Do not pry this cover up more than is necessary for clearance when sliding it forward. The retaining tabs on this cover can be easily broken. Figure 2-144 Remove the left-side cover (PD; 2 of 5) 3. Open the 1,500-sheet paper deck door, and then remove two screws (callout 2). Figure 2-145 Remove the left-side cover (PD; 3 of 5) 2 170 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove one screw (callout 3). Figure 2-146 Remove the left-side cover (PD; 4 of 5) 3 5. Rotate the top of the cover away from the chassis and then lift it up and remove it. Figure 2-147 Remove the left-side cover (PD; 5 of 5) 1 2 ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 171 Door (PD) 1. Open the 1,500-sheet paper deck door. 2. Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the door-stop plate (callout 2). Figure 2-148 Remove the door (PD; 1 of 3) 2 1 3. With the door open about halfway, gently pry open the door slide-bar slot and disengage the door slide-bar from the feeder. Figure 2-149 Remove the door (PD; 2 of 3) 172 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Lift the door straight up and off of the door hinge pins to remove it. CAUTION: The door hinge pins are not captive. If the feeder must be turned on its side or placed upside down, remove the hinge pins and the door spring (on the lower hinge pin). Place the pins and the spring where you will not lose them. Figure 2-150 Remove the door (PD; 3 of 3) ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 173 Motor (PD) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See Rear cover (PD) on page 167. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See Right-side cover (PD) on page 168. Remove the Motor (PD) 1. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1; J1703), and then release the wire harness from two retainers (callout 2). Figure 2-151 Remove the motor (PD; 1 of 2) 2 1 174 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 3). Slightly separate the motor from the feeder chassis, and then slide the motor toward the back of the paper deck to remove the motor. Figure 2-152 Remove the motor (PD; 2 of 2) 3 ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 175 Driver PCA (PD) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See Rear cover (PD) on page 167. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See Right-side cover (PD) on page 168. Remove the Driver PCA (PD) 1. Disconnect eight wire-harness connectors (callout 1). Figure 2-153 Remove the driver PCA (PD; 1 of 2) 1 176 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 2). Use needle-nose pliers to squeeze the top of one of the nylon PCA standoff (callout 3). Gently pop the PCA off of the tab. Repeat the procedure on the remaining standoff. Remove the PCA. Figure 2-154 Remove the driver PCA (PD; 2 of 2) 3 ENWW 2 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 177 Lift-drive assembly (PD) Before proceeding, remove the following components: ● 1,500-sheet feeder rear cover. See Rear cover (PD) on page 167. ● 1,500-sheet feeder right-side cover. See Right-side cover (PD) on page 168. ● 1,500-sheet feeder motor. See Motor (PD) on page 174. Remove the Lift-drive assembly (PD) 1. Disconnect one wire-harness connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from two retainers (callout 2). Figure 2-155 Remove the lift-drive assembly (PD; 1 of 3) 2 1 178 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove two screws (callout 3) and the remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 4). Figure 2-156 Remove the lift-drive assembly (PD; 2 of 3) 3 4 3. Remove three screws (callout 5), and then carefully remove the lift-drive assembly. Figure 2-157 Remove the lift-drive assembly (PD; 3 of 3) 5 ENWW 1,500-sheet paper deck (PD) 179 180 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Solve problems To use the information in this chapter, you should have a basic understanding of the HP LaserJet printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, the printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are contained in the English-language service manual. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes unless you understand the function of each product component. ENWW ● Solve problems checklist ● Menu map ● Preboot menu options ● Current settings pages ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Clear jams ● Paper does not feed automatically ● Use manual print modes ● Solve image-quality problems ● Clean the product ● Solve performance problems ● Solve connectivity problems ● Service mode functions ● Product updates 181 Solve problems checklist If the product is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist. 1. Make sure that the control-panel display shows one of the following messages: Ready, Paused… , or Sleep Mode. If no lights are illuminated or the display does not say Ready, Paused… , or Sleep Mode, use the Power-on checks section in the product service manual to troubleshoot the problem. 2. Check the cables. a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure. b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible. c. Check the network connection. 3. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. 4. Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints. 5. 6. 7. a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media. b. If the page jams in the product, see the jams section. If the configuration page prints, check the following items. a. If the page prints correctly, the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program. b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, see step 7. If no, check the following items: ● Print the fuser test page. ● Solve the print-quality problems, and then see step 7. At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline. Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. Double-click the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M602, or HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M603 item depending on the product model installed. -orMac OS X: Open Printer Setup Utility, and then double-click the line for the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M602, or HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M603 item depending on the product model installed. 182 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 8. Verify that you have installed the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer printer driver. Check the program to make sure that you are using the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer printer driver. 9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, the problem is with the program that you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print) complete these steps: a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed. b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, and select the new connection type that you are using. Solve problems checklist 183 Menu map Print the menu maps 184 1. At the control panel, press the Home 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages button. 3. Scroll to the Administration Menu Map item, and then press the OK button.. 4. Scroll up to the Print option, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Preboot menu options If an error occurs while the product is booting, an error message appears on the control-panel display. The user can access the Preboot menus. The Error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur. Access the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. Press the Stop 3. Use the Down arrow 4. Press the OK button to select a menu item. button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid. button to navigate the Preboot menu options. Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1. Turn the product on. 2. Press the Stop 3. Use the Down arrow 4. Scroll to the Startup Options item, and then press the OK button. 5. Scroll to the Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button. 6. Press the Back button twice to highlight Continue, and then press the OK button. button when the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid. button to highlight Administrator, and then press the OK button. NOTE: The product will initialize. Table 3-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 5) Menu option Continue First level Second level Third level Description Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and continues the normal boot process. If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds, the product returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting Continue. If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not apply. Sign In ENWW Enter the Administrator PIN or Service PIN if one is required to access the Preboot menu. Preboot menu options 185 Table 3-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 5) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Third level Description This item navigates to the Administrator sub menus. If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in) the Sign In displays. The user is required to sign in. Download This item initiates a preboot firmware download process. A USB device interface or a Network connection can be used to download firmware. Network See Product updates on page 397. USB See Product updates on page 397. Clean Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions. CAUTION: Selecting the Clean Disk item removes all data. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. The system is not bootable after this action—a firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state. Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is downloaded and saved). CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt is not provided. This allows user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code (product remains bootable). Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password. Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the action. When the confirmation prompt appears, press the OK button to clear the password. 186 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-2 Preboot menu options (2 of 5) Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrat or Manage Disk Clear Disk Select the Clear Disk item to enable an external device for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed. Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to this product. continued Description The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product. Use this function to have more then one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably. The data stored on the secure disk locked to this product always remains accessible to this product. Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an unlocked mode for single service event. The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk's encryption password with the new disk. The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product. Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to continue using the non-secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet to be installed secure disk. CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible. Retain Password Boot Device Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required (this might take a long time). NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase and Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status ENWW This item provides disk status information if any is available. Preboot menu options 187 Table 3-3 Preboot menu options (3 of 5) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device continued Third level Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device. Secure Erase continued Description Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required (this might take a long time). NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase and Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status External Device This item provides disk status information if any is available. Select the External Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device. Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required (this might take a long time). NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. ATA secure-erase command one pass over write. Erases the entire disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk. Erase and Unlock Select the Erase and Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product. NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. Erases the crypto key. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. Get Status 188 Chapter 3 Solve problems This item provides disk status information if any is available. ENWW Table 3-4 Preboot menu options (4 of 5) Menu option First level Administrator Configure LAN continued Second level Third level Description Select the Configure LAN item to setup the network settings for the PreBoot menu firmware upgrade. The network can be configured obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static. ENWW DHCP Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the DHCP server. Static Use this item to manually assign the network addresses. IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses. Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask. Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway. Save and Exit Select the Save and Exit item to save the manual settings. Preboot menu options 189 Table 3-5 Preboot menu options (5 of 5) Menu option First level Administrator Startup Options continued Second level Third level Description Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to the to Ready state. Cold Reset Check the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all customer settings (this item also returns all settings to factory defaults). Items in the Service menu are not reset. First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the product initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on. For example, the user is prompted to configure first time settings like Select Date/Time, Select Language, and other settings). Check this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on. When the product power is turned on the next time, this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used during configuration and the first time setting prompt is not used. Skip Plugins This item allows the device to be started without loading the third party applications. This means that files including Accessible Architecture on the disk will not be available at bootup. This is useful for troubleshooting problems with the hard disk without having to remove the hard disk. It also applies to flash file system disks on DIMMs. In this case, this function will cause the printer to configure the HP firmware first, followed by the third-party applications. The files on the disk will be available after the printer enters the Ready state. Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time the power is turned on without calibrating. Show Revision Not currently functional: Check the Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the device reaches the Ready state. Once the product power is turned on the next time, the Show Revision item is unchecked so the firmware revision is not shown. Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service menu access (both PreBoot and Device Maintenance application). Service personnel must have the Administrator remove the Lock Service setting before they can enter the Service menu. 190 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-6 Preboot menu options (5 of 5) Menu option First level Second level Administrator Startup Options Skip Disk Scan continued Third level Description Check the Skip Disk Scan item to allow the product to initialize without scanning the disk. If the product is crashing on Step 4/8, checking this item may allow the problem to be isolated. Once the device is turned on the next time, the Skip Disk Scan item is unchecked and the disk scan is not skipped. Embedded Jetdirect Off Check the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the embedded Jetdirect. By default this item is unchecked so that Jetdirect is always enabled. Service Tools ENWW This item requires the Service access code. Reset Password Use this item to clear the Administrator password. Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values. Preboot menu options 191 Current settings pages Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. Print the current settings pages 192 1. At the control panel, press the Home 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages button. 3. Scroll to the Current Settings Page item, and then press the OK button. 4. Scroll up to the Print option, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting process When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This chapter contains information to help diagnose and solve problems. ● Use the pretroubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: ● Are supply items within their rated life? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition. Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems. Pre-troubleshooting checklist The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem. General topic Questions Environment ● Is the product installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)? ● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source? ● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the product and the outlet (not a power strip)? ● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters? ● Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials? NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the coping processes. Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse affect on some product components (for example, the printcartridge OPC). ● ENWW Is the product exposed to direct sunlight? Troubleshooting process 193 General topic Questions Media ● Does the customer use only supported media? ● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)? ● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits? ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications? ● Is the media correctly placed in the tray? ● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack? ● Is the cassette correctly installed in the product? ● Is each print cartridge installed correctly? ● Are original HP print cartridges installed? ● Are the cartridges damaged? ● Is the fuser correctly installed? ● Is the fuser damaged? ● Are the trays correctly installed? ● Is the top cover closed? ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the product on for 10 to 20 minutes. ● Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the print cartridge to sit at room temperature for 1 to 2 hours. ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (for example, print cartridges or memory modules) from the product. ● Check to see whether the hardware or software configuration has changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software. ● Remove the product from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the product before beginning troubleshooting. ● For any print-quality issues, clean the paper path. Input trays Print cartridges Fuser Covers and trays Condensation Miscellaneous Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. 194 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-7 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Power on Is the product on and does a readable message display? No Yes 2 Control panel messages 3 Event log Does the message Ready display on the control panel? No Yes Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product. Does the event log print? No Yes Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power subsystem on page 196. After the control panel display is functional, see step 2. If an error message displays, see Interpret control-panel messages, status-alert messages, and event code errors on page 266. After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3. If the event log does not print, see Print an event log on page 351. If paper jams inside the product, see Clear jams on page 353. If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see Print an event log on page 351. After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4. 4 Configuration/ Status Pages Open the Reports menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all the accessories are installed. NOTE: If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5. To display: At the product control panel, press the Home button, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports menu. Are all the accessories installed? Yes 5 Image quality Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? Yes 6 Interface ENWW No No Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See Print-quality examples on page 380. After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the host computer? Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process. If error messages display on the control panel, see Print an event log on page 351. No When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process. Troubleshooting process 195 Power subsystem Power-on checks The basic product functions should start up as soon as the product is plugged into an electrical receptacle and the power button is pushed to the on position. Overview Turn on the product power. If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns appear, or asterisks remain on the display, perform power-on checks to locate the cause of the problem. NOTE: It might take the control panel 10 to 20 seconds to illuminate when the product power is turned on. During normal product operation, the left rear cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the left-side cover. If the fan is operating, you will feel a slight vibration and feel air passing into the product. You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating. When this fan is operational, the dc side of the power supply is functioning correctly. After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper path sensor is blocked). You should be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on. If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to separate print engine, formatter, and control-panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine test button on page 204). If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items. 1. Make sure that the product is plugged into an active electrical outlet receptacle that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the on/off button is in the on position. 3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control-panel display wire-harness is connected to connector J70 of the DC controller PCA. 5. Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other components. See Engine test button on page 204. If the main cooling fan is not operating, replace the power-supply assembly. See High voltage power supply on page 148. NOTE: It is important to have the control panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the control-panel display can be used to help locate errors. 196 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW If problems with the power-on check persist, refer to table Table 3-8 Power-on defect or blank display on page 197. Table 3-8 Power-on defect or blank display Problem Action The power cord is not plugged into the wall receptacle and connected to the product. Make sure that the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall receptacle and connected to the product. The correct voltage (power) is not available. Measure the voltage at the outlet. If necessary, plug the power cord into another circuit outlet. The power button is off. Set the button to the on position. NOTE: The power button is illuminated when the button is in the on position and the product is correctly operating. ENWW The overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit is activated. Wait for more than two minutes before turning the product back on. A fuse is blown. 1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the power supply. 2. Replace the power-supply assembly if necessary. Troubleshooting process 197 Table 3-8 Power-on defect or blank display (continued) Problem Action The main cooling fan (located on the left side near the rear of the product) does not turn on when the product is started. An operational fan indicates the following conditions: ● The AC power is present in the product. ● The DC power supply is functional (24 V, 5 V, and 3.3 V are being generated). ● The DC controller microprocessor is functional. If the fan is not working: 1. Turn the product off and remove the formatter. Disconnect the optional accessories. 2. Turn the product on and check the fan again. If the fan is still not working: 1. Verify that the fan is connected to the power supply (connector J64). 2. Replace the fan. See Fan FN101 on page 142. 3. If the error persists, replace the power-supply assembly. See High voltage power supply on page 148. 4. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCA on page 128. Note: The fan only operates during the initial startup and while printing, and when the temperature inside the product is too high. If the temperature is too high, the fan turns on to cool the inside of the product. The fan works, but the control-panel display is blank. 1. Print an engine test. See Engine test button on page 204. 2. If the engine test is successful, perform the following steps, in order. 3. 198 Chapter 3 Solve problems ◦ Reseat the control panel and formatter connector. See Control-panel assembly on page 109 and Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. ◦ Replace the control-panel cable. See Control-panel assembly on page 109. ◦ If the error persists, replace the control-panel assembly. See Control-panel assembly on page 109. ◦ If the error persists, replace the formatter. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. If the engine test is not successful, remove the formatter and attempt to perform the engine test again. If the engine test is successful with the formatter removed, replace the formatter. See Formatter cover and formatter cage on page 71. If the test is not successful with the formatter removed, replace the DC controller PCA. See DC controller PCA on page 128. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting Component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems. Understand lights on the formatter Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly. 1 2 3 ENWW 1 HP Jetdirect LEDs 2 Connectivity LED 3 Heartbeat LED Tools for troubleshooting 199 HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. 1. At the control panel, press the Home 2. Open the following menus: ● Administration ● Network Settings ● Jetdirect Menu button. 3. Scroll to and select the Link Speed item, and then press the OK button. 4. Select the appropriate link speed, and then press the OK button. Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly and then turns off. When the product has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. If the heartbeat LED is off, turn the product power off, make sure that the formatter is fully seated, and then turn the product on. If the problem persists, the formatter might have a problem. Replace the formatter. Connectivity LED The connectivity LED provides information about product operation. If a product error occurs, the formatter displays a message on the control-panel display. However, error situations can occur causing the formatter to control panel communication to be interrupted. NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either component. Use the connectivity LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these components. Formatter to control panel communication interruptions ● The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface. ● The control panel is not functioning (either a failed component or power problem). ● Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected. TIP: If the connectivity LED is illuminated—by an error condition or normal operation—the formatter is fully seated and the power is on. The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated. 200 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW The connectivity LED operates according to the product state. When the product is initializing, see Connectivity LED, product initialization on page 201. When the product is in Ready mode, see Connectivity LED, product operating on page 203. Connectivity LED, product initialization The following table describes the connectivity operation while the product is executing the firmware boot process. NOTE: When the initialization process completes the connectivity LED should be illuminated solid green—the LED is off if the product is in Sleep Mode If after initialization the connectivity LED is not solid green, see Connectivity LED, product operating on page 203. Table 3-9 Connectivity LED, product initialization Product initializing state Connectivity LED, normal state Connectivity LED, error state No power (power cord unplugged or power button off) Off Not applicable Power on (immediately after the power button pressed) Red, solid Red, solid ● Duration should be 1 second or less ● Firmware error; problem finding hardware and booting the serial peripheral interface flash memory ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot Green, solid Red, solid ● Firmware error; problem corrupt or missing SPI flash memory ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. HW checks on board DRAM Green, solid Red, solid ● Power on self check failure ◦ Boot process halted Replace the formatter. Control panel connection initializes Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: Control panel communication successful. If an error occurs, a message should appear on the control-panel display. ● Formatter to control panel connection failed ◦ Boot process continues Check the cables between the formatter and control panel for damage. Make sure that the cables are fully seated. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 201 Table 3-9 Connectivity LED, product initialization (continued) Product initializing state Connectivity LED, normal state Connectivity LED, error state Preboot menu available (including diagnostics) Green, solid Red, solid ● Diagnostic failure ◦ Follow diagnostic instructions Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process. Accessing disk for firmware image Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, disk error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Firmware boot Green, solid Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Green, heartbeat blink Yellow, fast flash NOTE: If applicable, error messages appear on the control-panel display. ● Not applicable LED off Product operational 49.XX.YY error or initialization freezes Control panel not connected Control panel not connected Control panel not connected NOTE: An error message (for example, 49.XX.YY) might appear on the control-panel display. Eventually a formatter connection missing message will appear. Turn the power off, and then on again to restart the initialization process. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. 202 Control panel connection interrupted after the product is operational Not applicable Yellow, fast flash Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable Approaching Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable Wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression above. Follows initialization progression above. Approaching wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression above. Follows initialization progression above. ● Chapter 3 Solve problems Control panel not connected ENWW Connectivity LED, product operating The following table describes the connectivity operation when the product completes the firmware boot process and is in the Ready state. Table 3-10 Connectivity LED, product operational LED color Description Green ● Yellow Red Off ● ● Normal operation ◦ Formatter is operating normally ◦ Firmware is operating normally ◦ Control panel is connected Formatter cannot connect to the control panel ◦ Check control panel connections ◦ Verify control panel functionality Formatter error or failure ◦ Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error ◦ Power on self test (formatter) failed ◦ Diagnostic (formatter) failed TIP: The connectivity LED is off if the power cord is unplugged, the product power button is in the off position, or the product is in Sleep Mode. ● Firmware or system freeze ◦ Check the control panel for an error message ◦ Control panel failure NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 203 Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer product. The product contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, component, and timing issues. Engine test button To verify that the product engine (all product components except the formatter, formatter DIMM, and the stacker or stapler/stacker) is functioning, print an engine-test page. Use a small, non-metallic, pointed object to depress the test-page buton, which is accessible through a slot in the right-side cover. Figure 3-1 Engine-test-page button The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page prints from the last tray that you printed from. However, if the product has been turned off and then on again since the most recent print job, the page will print from Tray 2. NOTE: A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. Formatter test To check that the formatter is working, print a configuration page. 204 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages 3. Scroll to the Configuration Page item, and then press the OK button. 4. Scroll to the Print item, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Print/Stop test Perform a Print/Stop Test to determine which image-formation component might be malfunctioning. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests Select the Print/Stop Test item, and then select from a range of 0 to 60,000 milli-seconds. NOTE: Select a range value that allows the page to progress through the paper path just past the component that you suspect is causing the print-quality problem. 4. Press the OK button to start the test. Drum rotation test The photosensitive drum, which is located in the print cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Remove the print cartridge. 3. Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark. 4. Install the print cartridge, and then close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear. 5. Open the product and inspect the mark on the cartridge drive gear. Verify that the mark moved. If there was no movement, inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it connects with the print-cartridge gears. If the drive gears function but the drum does not move, replace the print cartridge. NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled print cartridges are in use. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning correctly. Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If no image is present on the drum, perform the drum-rotation test. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 205 Paper-path test (and automatic sensor test) This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature: ● Print Test Page. Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test. ● Source. Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray. ● Duplex. Enable or disable two-sided printing. NOTE: Duplex models only. ● Copies. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests 3. Scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button. 4. Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run. Paper path sensors test (automatic) NOTE: To view the function of each sensor and how to toggle them manually, see Manual sensor test on page 208. This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. 206 button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests Scroll to Paper Path Sensors, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4. Select the paper path sensor to test. 5. Press OK to start the test, and then watch the control-panel display for the switch or sensor state to change from green to clear or clear to green. It might take a few seconds to change. Figure 3-2 Paper sensors PS106 PS108 PS700 PS103 PS102 PS1603 PS1603 PS1603 PS1704 Table 3-11 Paper sensor test designators ENWW Designator Sensor PS103 Top of page sensor PS102 Pre-feed sensor Tools for troubleshooting 207 Table 3-11 Paper sensor test designators (continued) Designator Sensor PS700 Fuser delivery sensor PS1502 Duplex sensor PS106 Left-side paper width sensor PS108 Right-side paper width sensor PS1603 Tray 3 media path sensor1 PS1603 Tray 4 media path sensor1 PS1603 Tray 5 media path sensor 1 PS1704 Tray 6 media path sensor 1 This sensor is present only if the accessory is installed. 1 Manual sensor test Use this diagnostic test to manually test the product sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests 3. Scroll to the Manual Sensor Test item, and then press the OK button. 4. Activate a switch or sensor, and then watch the control-panel display for the switch or sensor state to change from green to clear or clear to green. It might take a few seconds to change. Menus cannot be opened during this test, so the OK button serves the same function as the Stop button . Table 3-12 Manual sensor diagnostic tests Manual sensor test designator Sensor or switch Replacement component PS103 Top of page sensor, see Top of page sensor (PS103) on page 210 Replace the product PS102 Pre-feed sensor, see Pre-feed sensor (PS102) on page 211 Replace the product NOTE: See this procedure for the Tray 3, 4, 5, or 6 media path sensors (PS1603/1603/1603/1704). 208 PS1502 Duplex sensor, see Duplex sensor (PS1502) on page 213 Replace the duplexer PS700 Fuser delivery sensor, see Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) on page 212 Replace the fuser Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-12 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued) Manual sensor test designator Sensor or switch Replacement component PS106/108 Left-side and right-side paper width sensors, see Media width sensors 1/2 (PS106/108) on page 214 Replace the product PS1603/1704 PF/PD media path sensors, see Pre-feed sensor (PS102) on page 211 Replace the product PS104 Output bin full sensor, see Output bin full sensor (PS104) on page 215 Replace the product PS101 Tray 2 paper present sensor, see Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) on page 217 Replace the product PS107 Tray 2 top of stack sensor, see Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) on page 218 Replace the cassette pickup assembly SW102 Tray 2 paper size switches, see Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) on page 219 Replace the cassette pickup assembly NOTE: ENWW See this procedure for the Tray 3, 4, 5, or 6 sensors and switches. Tools for troubleshooting 209 Top of page sensor (PS103) 1. Open the top cover and then remove the print cartridge. 2. Activate the top of page sensor (PS103) flag. NOTE: You might need to lift the flap—use the green handles—to expose the sensor flag. Figure 3-3 Test the top of page sensor 3. 210 Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Pre-feed sensor (PS102) NOTE: Use this procedure to test the paper feeder (PS1603) and paper deck (PS1704) media path sensors 1. Remove the Tray 2 cassette. 2. Insert a piece of paper to override the Tray 2 pre-feed sensor (PS102). NOTE: The paper must be thick enough to depress and hold in place the sensor actuator arm. Figure 3-4 Test the Tray 2 pre-feed sensor (PS102) Figure 3-5 paper feeder and paper deck media path sensors ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 211 Fuser delivery sensor (PS700) 1. Open the rear output bin. 2. Activate the fuser delivery sensor (PS700) flag. Figure 3-6 Test the fuser delivery sensor (PS700) 3. 212 Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Duplex sensor (PS1502) 1. Remove the duplexer. 2. Verify that the duplexer sensor (PS1502) flag moves freely. 3. If the flag does not move freely, replace the duplexer. Figure 3-7 Test the fuser duplex sensor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 213 Media width sensors 1/2 (PS106/108) 1. Open the top cover and then remove the print cartridge. 2. Activate the left- or right-side paper width sensors (PS106/108). Figure 3-8 Test the fuser pressure-release sensor 214 3. Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). 4. If the sensor does not respond, check the connectors at the DC controller. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Output bin full sensor (PS104) This sensor flag is located in the output bin area. Activate the sensor flag, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response. Figure 3-9 Test the output bin full sensor (PS104) ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 215 Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) 1. Open Tray 1, and then activate the Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) flag. Figure 3-10 Test the Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) 2. 216 Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) 1. Remove the Tray 2 cassette. 2. Activate the Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) senor flag Figure 3-11 Test the Tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) 3. ENWW Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Tools for troubleshooting 217 Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) 1. Remove the Tray 2 cassette. 2. Activate the Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) senor flag. Figure 3-12 Test the Tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) 3. 218 Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) NOTE: Use this procedure for the Tray 3, 4, 5, or 6 sensors and switches. 1. Remove the Tray 2 cassette. 2. Activate the Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102). Figure 3-13 Test the Tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) 3. ENWW Check the control-panel display for sensor response (the dot on the display will turn green). Tools for troubleshooting 219 Tray/Bin manual sensor test Use this test to test the tray and bin sensors and switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests 3. Scroll to the Manual Tray/Bin Sensor Test item, and then press the OK button. 4. Activate a switch or sensor, and then watch the control-panel display for the switch or sensor state to change from green to clear or clear to green. It might take a few seconds to change. Table 3-13 Manual sensor test 2 diagnostic tests Manual sensor test 2 designator Sensor or switch PS1603 Paper feeder sensor PS1704 Paper deck sensor NOTE: The locations of these switches and sensors are the same as those in Pre-feed sensor (PS102) on page 211 with respect to the optional paper input accessories. Print/stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine. The test can be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. 220 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests 3. Scroll to the Print/Stop Test item, and then press the OK button. 4. Use the arrow buttons to set a stop time, when the print job should be interrupted, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-14 Print/Stop settings Duration Description 0 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 28 mm beyond the “black” paper guide of the registration assembly. 100 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 63 mm beyond the “black” paper guide of the registration assembly. 500 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops just prior to the paper entering the “nip” of the fuser assembly; the nip is the gap between the pressure roller and the hot fusing roller. 600 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 5 mm prior to the paper encountering the fuser assembly delivery photo sensor flag. 1,200 msecs (Simplex print operation) The leading edge of the paper stops 35 mm past the face-down delivery stacker rollers. The trailing edge of the paper is approximately 30 mm from the “nip” of the fusing rollers. 2,250 msecs (Duplex print operation) The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and into the output stacker rollers. The paper has now reversed direction and entered the duplex accessory. The leading edge of the paper stops approximately 15 mm before encountering the duplex assembly re-pick photosensor (PS1502). If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways. ● After the print job is completed press the Stop button to return to the Diagnostics menu before the timer times out. ● After the timer times out, press the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state. When the timer trips, the control panel display shows the message Printing stopped To continue, touch “OK”. Pressing the OK button will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press the Stop button first, and then press the OK button. Component tests These tests activate the selected component. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests 3. Scroll to the Print/Stop Test item, and then press the OK button. 4. Use the arrow buttons to select the particular component test that you want to perform, and then press the OK button. The following table describes the component tests. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 221 Component test Description DRUM MOTOR This test activates the drum motor. LASER SCANNER MOTOR This test activates the laser scanner motor. FUSER MOTOR This test activates the fuser motor and drive gears. TRAY PICKUP MOTOR This test activates the tray pickup motor. FEED ROLLER CLUTCH This test activates the paper feed roller clutch. MP TRAY SOLENOID These tests activate the pickup solenoid for the selected input tray. TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 4 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 5 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY 6 PICKUP SOLENOID 222 DUPLEXER SWITCHBACK MOTOR This test activates the duplexing reverse motor. DUPLEX REFEED MOTOR This test activates the duplexing feed motor. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Diagrams Block diagrams Main assemblies Figure 3-14 Main assemblies 2 1 3 6 5 7 4 ENWW 1 Laser/scanner unit 2 Lifter drive unit 3 Tray 2 pickup drive unit 4 Feed roller unit 5 Delivery unit 6 Fuser 7 Multipurpose tray pickup unit Tools for troubleshooting 223 Main parts Figure 3-15 Main parts 1 2 3 7 4 6 5 224 1 Transfer roller 2 Multipurpose tray pickup roller 3 Multipurpose tray feed roller 4 Multipurpose tray separation roller 5 Input tray separation roller (resides in input tray) 6 Input tray feed roller 7 Input tray pickup roller Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Motors and fans Figure 3-16 Motors and fans 1 2 3 4 5 8 6 7 ENWW 1 Fuser motor (M299) 2 Fan (FN102) 3 Drum motor (M102) 4 Fan (FN103) 5 Feed motor (M101) 6 Lifter motor (M103) 7 Fan (FN301) 8 Fan (FN101) Tools for troubleshooting 225 PCAs Figure 3-17 PCAs 2 1 1 Power supply PCA 2 DC controller PCA 500-sheet feeder Figure 3-18 500-sheet feeder main parts 1 2 3 5 226 4 1 Paper feeder pickup roller 2 Paper feeder lifter driver unit 3 Paper feeder pickup drive unit 4 Paper feeder separation roller 5 Paper feed roller Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Figure 3-19 500-sheet feeder solenoid and PCA 1 2 1 Driver PCA 2 Pickup solenoid 1,500-sheet feeder Figure 3-20 1,500-sheet feeder main units 1 2 3 ENWW 1 Front door unit 2 Pickup drive unit 3 Lifter drive unit Tools for troubleshooting 227 Figure 3-21 1,500-sheet feeder main parts 1 2 3 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation roller Figure 3-22 1,500-sheet feeder motor and PCA 1 2 228 1 Driver PCA 2 Lifter motor Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Connectors DC controller PCA connectors Figure 3-23 DC controller PCA connectors J90 J72 J80 J71 J86 J79 J94 J76 J74 J70 J93 SW700 J81 J98 J97 J95 J87 J96 J83 J78 J75 J84 J91 J88 J77 J73 J85 J89 J82 J99 J92 Table 3-15 DC controller connectors ENWW Connector Functionality Pin configuration J70 Control panel connector 8-pin J71 SL102 Tray 1 pickup solenoid 2-pin J72 SL101 Tray 2 pickup solenoid 2-pin J73 M103 Tray 2 lift motor 2-pin J74 TG101 memory tag I/O 2-pin J75 FN102 cooling fan 3-wire J76 PS104 face-down output full sensor 3-pin J77 CL101 feed clutch 3-pin (2-wire) J78 SW101 door open switch 3-pin J79 FN103 cooling fan 4-pin (3-wire) J80 Not used 6-pin J81 PS105 Tray 1 media present sensor 3-pin Tools for troubleshooting 229 Table 3-15 DC controller connectors (continued) Connector Functionality Pin configuration J82 Fusing assembly 7-wire J83 Envelope feeder accessory 5-pin J84 Duplex accessory 6-pin J85 Power supply PCA (+24Vdc/3.3Vdc) 6-wire J86 Scanner motor/beam detect 7-pin J87 M102 drum motor 8-pin (7-wire) J88 Paper deck accessory 5-pin J89 M299 fusing motor 10-pin J90 Stacker/stacker-stapler/mailbox 8-pin J91 M101 feed motor 7-pin J92 PS101 Tray 2 media present sensor 8-pin PS107 Tray 2 media stack sensor 1 PS907 Tray 2 media stack sensor 2 J93 Laser/driver PCA 11-pin J94 PS102 pre-feed sensor 12-pin PS108 media width sensor 2 PS103 top of page sensor PS106 media width sensor 1 230 J95 Power supply PCA 18-pin J96 Power supply PCA 20-pin J97 Intermediate PCA to formatter PCA 32-pin ribbon J98 Not used J99 SW102 Tray 2 media size switches TB700 3.3 volts DC TB701 GRN Chapter 3 Solve problems 4-pin ENWW Product base connectors Figure 3-24 Product base connectors ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 231 500-sheet paper tray connectors Figure 3-25 500-sheet paper tray connectors 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors Figure 3-26 1,500-sheet paper tray connectors 232 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Duplexer connectors Figure 3-27 Duplexer connectors Envelope feeder connectors Figure 3-28 Envelope feeder connectors ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 233 General timing chart Figure 3-29 General timing chart 234 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Circuit diagrams Figure 3-30 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) 6 5 4 3 Fixing unit Main thermistor TB17 TH2 1 2 Fixing delivery sensor 1 2 2 1 J131L J131DH J778D TB18 2 TP H2 J135 J137 2 1 1 PS700 2 PS699 J778L TP1 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 J929 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 Fixing pressure release sensor J778DH 1 1 2 2 Thermoswitch Sub thermistor TH1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J129 2 100V 200V H1 J131D TB19 HEATER J134F 1 1 J134M H N H N 2 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB15 1 1 TB28 J128MB_BUS 6 5 4 3 2 1 J136F J136M J128MA_BUS 2 A6 J128DWH J128DA J128DB 6 5 1 B6 A6 2 4 3 5 Environment sensor B6 1 2 4 3 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 J01 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 24VA 24VA GND 1 3 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J64 1 2 3 1 2 3 Pre-feed sensor MFLK GND J66 MFDRV 3 3 PS102 J95 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 J50 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 8 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 5 4 3 J51 1 1 4 3 2 1 J96 2 2 7 6 5 6 7 7 6 5 7 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 J52 5 5 4 3 4 3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 2 1 2 3 J53 1 1 J99 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J72 1 1 J73 2 2 1 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J97 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J103 GND TB701 3.3V TB700 PWRON CAN-L CAN-H 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V /PDLV /PFED /TOP /CCRT VSCLK VSC GND /BD GND VDO2 /VDO2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND /VDO1 VDO1 GND FPO FPCK /FPCS FPI 24R /LMON 24R /CSTSL PLVL2SNSDR /PLVL2SNS CSTSNSDR GND /CSTSNS J92 PLVLSNSDR GND /PLVLSNS /CSTSIZE1 GND /CSTSIZE2 /CSTSIZE0 +3.3V IOTRXD IOTTXD MD0 MD2 GND 4 2 2 ENVTMP ENVTMPG ENVTMPG TB23 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 J80 5 1 1 1 TB35 TB31 TB36 TB32 TB34 TB33 J85 6 TB11 Power supply PCB 5 J82 FSRTHG1 FSRTH1 GND /FSRARI DELSNS GND DELDR COILB COILA 1 H DF3LK DF2DR MFLK CURRMS CURDIS FPRSNS FSRSAFE /AC200 MFFL /MFHF ENVTMPG ENVTMP FSRTH2GND FSRTH2 GND FSRD1 FSRD2 /RLD PRO5V /ZEROX 5 6 FN101 24VB 24VB GND GND PRACCK PRACPWM HVTCK TRNCK PRDCCK TRAD TRPWM TRPCK TNRSP2 TNRSP1 DVACCK PRDCPWM DVACPWM DVDCPWM 6 7 4 GND GND 3.3V 7 2 5 4 3 GND FPRSNS 2 3 2 FSRTH2 FSRTHG2 TG101 1 2 FPRSNSDR 1 J62 TB10 TB20 TB21 J63 3 2 Cooling fan 1 FN301 D2FDRV 3RDFLK GND N.C. 3 1 1 2 2 2 1 HEATERC HEATER1 TB14 4 5 6 FILMBIAS KAATUBIAS 1 2 J128FB_BUS 2 1 3 N J1 J128FA_BUS 1 J74 Cooling fan 3 TH3 6 5 J128DDW 3 1 1 H 6 TB13 4 1 2 N J128LDW J128LWH J128LA J128LB M103 GND TB102 3.3V TB101 M VDO2 /VDO2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 2 PWRON CAN-L CAN-H 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V /PDLV /PFED /TOP /CCRT VSCLK VSC GND /BD GND 1 /VDO1 VDO1 GND FPO FPCK /FPCS FPI FFC Lifter motor 3 2 1 2 Intermediate PCB 1 SL PS101 C16 C14 C15 B15 B16 2 1 3 2 1 SW102 ENWW B14 C14 B13 C13 B12 C12 C9 C6 C3 B4 C4 C1 B2 A3 A3 B4 B5 C5 C2 B3 A4 A4 A5 A5 B6 B7 C7 C4 B5 A6 A6 A7 A7 B8 C8 C5 B6 B7 A8 A8 B9 B10 C10 C6 C7 B8 A9 A9 A10 A10 B11 C11 C8 B9 B10 A11 A11 B3 C3 J87 PS907 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 A1 J103M B1 B2 C2 J103F B1 A2 A2 C1 J187 PS107 Media stack surface Media stack surface sensor 1 sensor 2 Cassette media size switches C15 C9 C10 B11 A12 A12 GND 2 1 2 1 C11 B12 A13 A13 SDL SCL GND VD01 /VD01 GND GND GND GND VD02 /VD02 GND /BD GND GND SC SCLK GND /CCRT /TOP GND /PFED /PDLV 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V GND CAN-H CAN-L GND PWRON GND GND GND GND 3 3 FPCK /FPCS FPI GND FP0 GND 4 4 C12 B13 A14 A14 B15 B16 C16 J120 C13 B14 A15 A15 A16 A16 3 24R 24R /DMFG /DMDEC /DMACC GND GND GND Cassette pickup solenoid Cassette media presence sensor FPCK /FPCS FPI GND FP0 GND SDL SCL GND VD01 /VD01 GND GND GND GND VD02 /VD02 GND /BD GND GND SC SCLK GND /CCRT /TOP GND /PFED /PDLV 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 5.0V 5.0V 5.0V GND CAN-H CAN-L GND PWRON GND GND GND GND GND SL101 7 7 6 6 5 4 5 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 M Formatter M102 Drum motor Tools for troubleshooting 235 Figure 3-31 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) 2 1 Laser/ Scanner unit J170 Operation panel TB25 1 1 8 8 2 2 7 7 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 5 5 4 4 6 6 3 3 7 7 2 2 8 8 1 1 9 9 Scanner motor GND 3.3V FPO FPI FPCK 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J143 /FPCS GND BD PCB 5V 3 2 1 3 2 1 J70 Laser driver PCB J144 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FN103 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 D2FDRV 4THFLK GND N.C. 1 2 3 3 FN102 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J93 24R /SMACC /SMDEC GND 3.3V /BDI GND J86 Cooling fan 2 GND 2NDFLK DF2DR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J75 J78 1 1 J76 J77 1 Feed clutch CL101 2 CL 1 1 2 2 3 Multi-purpose tray pickup solenoid 3 FULDR GND FULSNS 24R N.C. /TRCL 1 2 SL 1 1 2 2 MPSNSDR 24R /MPSL GND MPSNS 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 PS104 3 1 Face-down tray media full sensor 2 J123 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 PS105 Multi-purpose tray media presence sensor 1 SW101 Door open detection switch C Top of page Media width sensor sensor 1 PS103 PS108 PS106 J118D 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 3 Envelope feeder J905M J905 J118DA 2 2 J176 1 J81 J71 SL102 Media width sensor 2 4 2 3 24R GND OPSOUT 5 5 3 2 4 4 4 1 3 3 1 3 OPSIN OPSCLK 2 2 1 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 1 3 1 J83 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 1 GND 24R OPSCLK OPSIN OPSOUT J906 J94 /PRESNS GND PREDR /WIDTH2SNS GND WIDTH2DR /TOPSNS GND TOPDR /WIDTHSNS GND WIDTHDR 9 9 5 2 J901 J118DB 12 11 10 12 11 10 D VDO1 /VDO1 CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 VDO2 /VDO2 LPHI PDOUT GND 24VA 5V N.C. 24VC 3 2 1 Cooling fan 3 1 J145 J79 DC controller PCB 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 J807F (paper feeder) J1001(paper deck) 1 1 3 2 2 3 1 OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK 24R J105LB J105DB J105D J88 Paper feeder or Paper deck J105LA J105DA 24R GND OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK J105L B GND Stacker or Staple stacker or Muili-bin mail box Test print switch SW800 1 J106DB J90 2 GND CAN-H CAN-L GND GND PWRON 24R 24R J106LB 4 8 8 3 7 7 2 6 6 1 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 4 2 7 7 3 3 8 8 2 4 1 3 4 J106L J106D 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 J89 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J84 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 A J124DA J191 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 M M101 J221 1 2 1 3 2 4 3 6 5 4 5 7 6 8 7 10 9 8 9 10 M 236 2 3 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 2 5 5 1 6 6 2 4 1 1 2 J124DB J703 1 3 M299 Chapter 3 Solve problems J124LA 1 Fixing motor Duplexing unit J124L 4 3 Feed motor J1101 J106LA OPSCLK OPSIN OPSOUT GND DUPARI 24R GND GND GND FMREV /DMACC /DMDEC /DMFG 24R 24R 24R 24R 24R /MMFG /MMDEC /MMACC GND GND J106DA 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 J91 GND CAN-H CAN-L GND GND PWRON 24R 24R 2 24R DUPARI GND OPSOUT OPSIN OPSCLK J124LB ENWW 3 A3 2 2 1 1 2 4 B4 3 3 4 2 J1615DB J1615DA J1615D 1 J105LB J105LA J105L To paper feeder or paper deck 1 3 B4 J1601 1 GND 2 +24V 3 CMD 4 CLK 5 STS 1 CMD J1602 2 STS 3 CLK 4 NC 5 +24V 6 GND J1609 2 GND 1 DOOR_SNS A3 J1603 5 6 4 3 2 1 +3.3 DR +3.3V 1 GND IOT_RXD 2 PPATH_SNS IOT_TXD 3 J1621 3 MOD0 To printer or paper feeder 2 MOD2 GND 1 J1610 J1604 1 J1605 2 2 1 1 M J1606 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 SW1600 3 3 4 3 4 4 1 J1623 J1607 PS1600 PF media size switch Paper feeder driver PCA 2 2 1 +24V SL SL1600 +24V PS1603 PICK_SL M1600 J1608 5 3 1 4 2 RED +3.3 DR PF media presence sensor +3.3 DR PF lifter motor LIFTMTR PF pickup solenoid WHITE BROWN PLVL_INIT PF media path sensor SIZE_SNS_1 BLUE GND SIZE_SNS_2 YELLOW +3.3 DR GND PURPLE P_SNS SIZE_SNS_3 YELLOW GND PLVL_PICK ENWW BLUE PF media stack surface sensor 1 PF media stack surface sensor 2 PS1601 PS1602 Media stack surface sensor PCA Figure 3-32 500-sheet paper tray circuit diagram Tools for troubleshooting 237 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 PD media stack surface sensor 2 PD media stack surface sensor 1 1 2 3 4 J1707 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 GND Media stack surface sensor PCA PS1702 PS1701 J1701 1 CMD 2 STS 3 CLK 4 +24V 5 GND J1710 3 1 PS1700 2 2 3 1 4 J1708 PD media presence sensor J1721 4 3 3 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 SW1700 2 SL 1 1 PD pickup solenoid SL1700 2 2 2 GND 3 1 PS1704 1 3 +3.3 DR J1705 PD media path sensor J1723 4 4 3 3 M 2 2 1 1 M1700 PD lifter motor J1703 J1706 Paper deck driver PCA J1702 P_SNS J105LA PLVL_PICK J1720 GND J105LB GND PLVL_INIT BLUE SIZE_SNS_3 +3.3 DR J105L MOD2 +3.3 DR YELLOW GND SIZE_SNS_2 B4 MOD0 +3.3 DR RED SIZE_SNS_1 A3 IOT_TXD WHITE PICK_SL LIFT_A To printer or paper feeder +3.3V IOT_RXD BROWN +24V LIFT_B LIFT_AN Chapter 3 Solve problems LIFT_BN 238 PPATH_SNS PD media size switch GND 2 2 3 1 +3.3 DR PS1703 1 3 DOOR_SNS J1704 PD door open sensor J1722 4 Figure 3-33 1,500-sheet paper tray circuit diagram ENWW 3 3 J1856 CMD 2 1 J1855 2 STS 1 4 3 CLK To printer 2 1 J1854 5 4 24V J1804 GND FT1800 MT1800 2 2 1 1 PS1802 3 3 3 2 1 J1850 Envelope multiple feed sensor J1800 Not used J1801 Envelope feeder driver PCA 3.3V 3 GND 1 CPU PS1800 4 4 2 2 M1800 M 3 3 1 1 4 3 2 1 J1852 Envelope feeder pickup motor J1802 *A Envelope presence sensor A 4 *B ENWW B 2 Figure 3-34 Envelope feeder circuit diagram Tools for troubleshooting 239 IMOUTB IMOUT/B J66 J124DB J124D J124LB Duplex driver PCA 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 B3 1 3 4 4 4 1 3 3 5 5 3 6 6 A4 2 3 1 1 +24V A4 2 2 2 To printer 1 1 3 2 1 4 4 OPSOUT B3 5 5 6 6 J1506 GND J1503 1 1 IMOUTA IMOUT/A 4 4 J1521 DUPARI 4 4 /OPSCLK 3 3 /OPSIN 2 2 1 4 4 4 J124DA J124LA J124L J1501 2 2 3 3 PMOUTB PMOUT/B J1500 1 1 3 3 4 4 PMOUTA PMOUT/A 2 2 1 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND 1 1 MOD2 J1520 MOD0 M IOT TXD M +3.3V IOT RXD M1502 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 FM1501 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 1 1 J1504 Duplex cooling fan J1505 1 3 J1522 3 PS1503 5 6 4 5 GND PICKSNS 6 2 3 2 GND PICKDR 4 1 FUPSNS 3 1 J1502 FU_DR Side registration guide home position sensor REJI_DR Duplex feed motor REJISNS M1501 GND GND Chapter 3 Solve problems FLOCK0 240 FDRIVE Duplex Reverse motor J1524 1 1 2 2 3 3 J1523 1 1 2 2 3 3 Duplex media re-pickup sensor PS1502 Face-up sensor PS1501 Figure 3-35 Duplexer circuit diagram ENWW Internal print-quality test pages Print-quality-troubleshooting pages Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. ENWW button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Print Quality Pages Scroll to the Print Fuser Test Page item, and then press the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 241 Clean the paper path Process a cleaning page 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Calibrate/Cleaning 3. Scroll to the Print Cleaning Page item, and then press the OK button. 4. The product prints a cleaning page, and then returns to the main menu. Discard the printed page. Set up an auto cleaning page Use the procedure in this section to set up an automatic cleaning page. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. . ● Device Maintenance ● Calibrate/Cleaning ● Cleaning Settings Use the arrow keys and the OK button to select and set the following settings: ● Auto Cleaning ◦ ● Set to On Cleaning Interval ◦ Select the number of pages at which to automatically clean the paper path TIP: HP recommends processing a cleaning page after every 5000 printed pages. ● Cleaning Size ◦ 242 Select Letter or A4 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Print configuration page Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you print a configuration page. In addition to the main configuration page, the embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print. Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. ENWW button. ● Administration ● Reports ● Configuration/Status Pages Scroll to the Configuration Page item, and then press the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 243 4. Scroll to the Print item, and then press the OK button. Figure 3-36 Configuration page 1 4 5 2 6 7 3 Table 3-16 Configuration page elements 244 Item Description Item Description 1 General Information 5 Event Log 2 Installed Personalities and Options 6 Security 3 HP Web Services 7 Paper Trays and options 4 Memory Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Figure 3-37 HP embedded Jetdirect page 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date. 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions. 4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address 5 IPv4 information 6 IPv6 information Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready". ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 245 Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive image defect ruler Defects on product rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page, corresponding to the circumference of the roller that is causing the defect. Measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the following table or the repetitive-defect ruler to determine which roller is causing the defect. To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller before replacing it. CAUTION: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with water. NOTE: The following table replaces the graphical repetitive defect ruler. You can make your own ruler by using these measurements. For the most accurate results, use a metric ruler. Table 3-17 Repetitive defects Component Distance between defects Primary charging roller 37.7 mm (1.5 inches) Transfer roller 47 mm (1.85 inches) Developer roller 63 mm (2.5 inches) Tray 1 pickup roller 63 mm (2.5 inches) Tray 1 feed roller 79 mm (3.1 inches) Tray 1 separation roller Tray 2 feed roller 79 mm (3.1 inches) Tray 2 pickup roller Tray 2 separation roller Fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller 94 mm (3.75 inches) Photosensitive drum 94 mm (3.75 inches) NOTE: Defects on the tray pickup rollers or the Tray 1 pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect. Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image. To use all of the capabilities of this product, a firmware upgrade might be required. HP recommends that you periodically go to www.hp.com/go/lj600Series_software to see if a new version of firmware is available. 246 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Control-panel menus Retrieve Job from USB menu NOTE: You must enable this feature by using the control-panel menus or the HP Embedded Web Server before it can be used. To enable this feature by using the control-panel menus, open the Administration menu, open the Retrieve From USB Settings sub menu, and then select the Enable option. To enable this feature by using the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Print tab. To display: At the product control panel, press the Home Job from USB menu. button, and then select the Retrieve First level Second level Values Select a file or folder Copies Retrieve Job from Device Memory menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home Job from Device Memory menu. button, and then select the Retrieve First level Second level Values All Jobs (With PIN) Print Copies Print and Delete Copies Delete All Jobs (No PIN) Print Copies Print and Delete Copies Delete Yes No Print Copies Print and Delete Copies Delete Print Copies Print and Delete Copies Delete Yes No ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 247 Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu. button, and then select the Supplies In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-18 Supplies menu First level Second level Manage Supplies Print Supplies Status Supply Settings Third level Fourth level Values Black Cartridge Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue Continue* Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Default values for the CE390A cartridge: ● M601 = 8% ● M602 = 11% ● M603 = 20% Default values for the CE390X cartridge: Maintenance Kit Very Low Settings ● M602 = 5% ● M603 = 9% Stop Prompt to continue Continue* Low Threshold Settings Supply Messages Low Message 1-100% Default = 10% On* Off Level Gauge On* Off Reset Supplies New Maintenance Kit No Yes Black Cartridge The status is displayed. Maintenance Kit The status is displayed. 248 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home button, and then select the Trays menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-19 Trays menu First level Second level Values Manage Trays Use Requested Tray Exclusively* First Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless Loaded Size/Type Prompt Display* Do Not Display Use Another Tray Enabled* Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto * Yes Tray 2 Model Standard Tray* Custom Tray Image Rotation Standard* Alternate Override A4/Letter Yes* No Envelope Feeder Size Select a size from the list. Envelope Feeder Type Select a type from the list. Tray Size Select a size from the list. Tray Type Select a type from the list. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 249 Administration menu Reports menu button, select the Administration To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Reports menu. Table 3-20 Reports menu First level Second level Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map Configuration Page Supplies Status Page Usage Page File Directory Page Current Settings Page Other Pages PCL Font List PS Font List General Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the General Settings menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-21 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format Fourth level Values DD/MMM/YYYY MMM/DD/YYYY YYYY/MMM/DD Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) 24 hours Date/Time Date Month Day Select values from the lists. Year Time Hour Minute Select values from the lists. AM/PM 250 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-21 General Settings menu (continued) First level Energy Settings Second level Sleep Timer Settings Third level Fourth level Values Time Zone Select the time zone from the list. Adjust for Daylight Savings On* Sleep/Auto Off Timer Enabled* Off Disabled Sleep/Auto Off After If you enabled the sleep/ auto off timer, enter a value between 0 and 120 minutes. Default value: 30 minutes Wake/Auto On Events All Events* Network port Power button only Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray Print Test Page X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Y1 Shift X2 Shift Y2 Shift Adjust Paper Types Select from a list of paper types that the product supports. The available options are the same for each paper type. Print Mode Select from a list of print modes. Resistance Mode Normal Up Down Humidity Mode Normal High Restore Modes Optimize Line Detail Normal* Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Off ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 251 Table 3-21 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Restore Optimize Resolution 300 x 300 dpi 600 x 600 dpi FastRes 1200* ProRes 1200 Economode Off* On Toner Density Range: 1 - 5 Default = 3 Quiet Mode Off* On Jam Recovery Auto* Off On Manage Stored Jobs Quick Copy Job Storage Limit 1-100 Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Off* Default = 32 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Default Folder Name Sort Stored Jobs By Job Name* Date Restore Factory Settings 252 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Retrieve From USB Settings menu button, select the Administration To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Retrieve From USB Settings menu. Table 3-22 Retrieve From USB Settings menu First level Values Enable Retrieve from USB Enabled Disabled* General Print Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the General Print Settings menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-23 Print Settings menu First level Second level Manual Feed Values Enabled Disabled* Courier Font Regular* Dark Wide A4 Enabled Disabled* Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled* Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled* Personality Auto* PCL PS PDF PCL Form Length Range: 5 – 128 Default = 60 Orientation Portrait* Landscape ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 253 Table 3-23 Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Font Source Internal* USB Font Number Range: 0 – 110 Default = 0 Font Pitch Range: 0.44 – 99.99 Default = 10.00 Font Point Size Range: 4.00 – 999.75 Default = 12.00 Symbol Set Select from a list of symbol sets. Append CR to LF No* Yes Suppress Blank Pages No* Yes Media Source Mapping Standard* Classic 254 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Default Print Options menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Default Print Options menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. First level Second level Values Number of Copies Default Paper Size Default Custom Paper Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports. Unit of Measure Inches mm X Dimension Y Dimension Output Bin Select from a list of available output bins. Sides 1-sided* 2-sided 2-Sided Format Book-style* Flip-style Edge-To-Edge Enabled Disabled* Display Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Display Settings menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-24 Display Settings menu First level Second level Values Display Brightness Range -10 to 10 Language Select from a list of languages that the product supports. Show IP Address Display Hide Inactivity Timeout Range: 10 – 300 seconds Default = 60 seconds ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 255 Table 3-24 Display Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Clearable Warnings On Job* Continuable Events Auto continue (10 seconds)* Press OK to continue Manage Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-25 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Values Black Cartridge Very Low Settings Stop Print Supplies Status Supply Settings Prompt to continue Continue* Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Default values for the CE390A cartridge: ● M601 = 8% ● M602 = 11% ● M603 = 20% Default values for the CE390X cartridge: Maintenance Kit Very Low Settings ● M602 = 5% ● M603 = 9% Stop Prompt to continue Continue* Low Threshold Settings 1-100% Default = 10% Supply Messages Low Message On* Off 256 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-25 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Level Gauge On* Off Reset Supplies New Maintenance Kit No Yes Manage Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Manage Trays menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-26 Manage Trays menu First level Values Use Requested Tray Exclusively* First Manually Feed Prompt Always* Unless Loaded Size/Type Prompt Display* Do Not Display Use Another Tray Enabled* Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled* Enabled Duplex Blank Pages Auto * Yes Tray 2 Model Standard Tray Custom Tray Image Rotation Standard Alternate Override A4/Letter Yes* No ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 257 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu button, select the Administration To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Stapler/Stacker Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-27 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu First level Values Stapling None* Top left or right Top left Top right Staples Very Low Continue* Stop Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu button, select the Administration To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-28 Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu First level Values Operation Mode Mailbox* Stacker Job Separator Collator 258 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Network Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Network Settings menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-29 Network Settings menu First level Values I/O Timeout Range: 5 – 300 sec Default = 15 Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details. Table 3-30 Jetdirect Menu First level Second level Information Print Sec Page Third level Fourth level Values Yes No* TCP/IP Enable On* Off Host Name IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp DHCP* Auto IP Manual Manual Settings IP Address Enter the address. Subnet Mask Enter the address. Default Gateway Enter the address. NOTE: This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu. Default IP Auto IP* Legacy DHCP Release No* Yes DHCP Renew No* Yes ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 259 Table 3-30 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Primary DNS Secondary DNS IPV6 Settings Enable Off On* Address Manual Settings Enable Address DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Unavailable* Always Primary DNS Secondary DNS Proxy Server Proxy Port Idle Timeout Security Secure Web HTTPS Required* HTTPS Optional IPSEC Keep Disable* 802.1X Reset Keep* Reset Security Yes No* Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Yes No* HTTP Test Yes No* SNMP Test Yes No* Data Path Test Yes No* 260 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-30 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Select All Tests Values Yes No* Execution Time [H] Range: 1 – 60 hours Default = 1 hour Execute No* Yes Ping Test Dest Type IPV4 IPV6 Dest IPv4 Dest IPv6 Packet Size Timeout Count Print Results Yes No Execute Yes No Ping Results Packets Sent Packets Received Percent Lost RTT Min RTT Max RTT Average Ping in Progress Yes No ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 261 Table 3-30 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Refresh Yes Values No Link Speed Auto* 10T Half 10T Full 100TX Half 100TX Full 1000T Full 262 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. button, select the Administration In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-31 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Values Print Event Log View Event Log Print Paper Path Page Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Page Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensors Select from a list of the product sensors. Paper Path Test Print Test Page Source Select from a list of the available trays. Destination Select from a list of the available bins. Duplex Off* On Copies 1* 10 50 100 500 Stacking Off On Manual Sensor Test Manual Tray/Bin Sensor Test Component Test Print/Stop Test ENWW Range: 0 – 60,000 Tools for troubleshooting 263 Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu CAUTION: Data backup and restoration is the responsibility of the customer/administrator of the product. Service personnel should not back up or restore customer data under any circumstances. To display: At the product control panel, press the Home button, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-32 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values Backup Data Scheduled Backups Enable Scheduling Enter a time Days Between Enter the number of days Backup Now Export Last Backup Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file. Calibrate/Cleaning menu button, select the Device To display: At the product control panel, press the Home Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 3-33 Calibrate/Cleaning menu First level Second level Values Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning Off* On Cleaning Interval From the list, select the number of pages at which to automatically clean the product. Cleaning Size Letter A4 Print Cleaning Page 264 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW USB Firmware Upgrade menu button, select the Device To display: At the product control panel, press the Home Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the onscreen instructions. Service menu To display: At the product control panel, press the Home Maintenance menu, and then select the Service menu. button, select the Device The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 265 Interpret control-panel messages, status-alert messages, and event code errors The control-panel messages and event code errors indicate the current product status or situations that might require action. NOTE: Event log errors do not appear on the control-panel display. Access the event log to view or print the event log errors. Control-panel messages appear temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message by pressing the OK button to resume printing or by pressing the Stop button to cancel the job. With certain messages, the job might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected. If the message is related to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement. For some messages, restarting the product might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product might require service. 10.00.33 Description A used supply is in use (end of life). Recommended action No action necessary. 10.00.35 Description An incompatible supply is in use. Recommended action Install the correct HP print cartridge for this product (CE390A or CE390X). NOTE: The CE390X cartridge is not compatiable with the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601. 10.00.60 Description The black cartridge is low. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 266 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 10.00.69 Description The black cartridge is very low. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.00.91 Description Cartridge motor stall. Recommended action Replace the print cartridge. 10.0X.Y0 Supply memory error Description The product cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or a memory tag is missing from the print cartridge. Memory error (Y = 0) ◦ 10.00.00 (event code) Black print cartridge Memory tag missing (Y = 1) ◦ 10.00.10 (event code) Black print cartridge Recommended action ENWW 1. Remove, and then reinstall the indicated print cartridge. 2. If the error reappears, turn the power off, and then on. 3. Check the cartridge memory tag. If it is damaged, replace the cartridge. 4. If the error persists, replace the indicated print cartridge. Tools for troubleshooting 267 10.23.35 Description An incompatible fuser is in use. Recommended action Replace the fuser. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.23.50 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the order threshold. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.51 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the replace threshold. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.52 Description The fuser kit life was reset above the reset threshold. Recommended action No action necessary. 10.23.60 Description The product indicates when fuser kit is very low. The actual remaining fuse kit life might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. 268 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the fuser kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.23.70 Printing Past Very Low Description The product indicates when the fuser kit is very low. The actual remaining fuse kit life might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the fuser kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.26.15 Description The product indicates when the maintenance might need to be replaced. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the maintenance kit. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the maintenance kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.26.50 Description The maintenance kit was reset. Recommended action No action required. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 269 10.26.60 Description The product indicates when the maintenance kit is very low. The actual remaining maintenance kit life might vary. You do not need to replace the maintenance kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the maintenance kit. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the maintenance kit part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.XX.34 Used Supply In Use Description The print cartridge is used. ◦ 10.00.34 (event code) Black print cartridge Recommended action If you believe this is a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. NOTE: Removing a cartridge from one product and then installing it in a different product (for testing functionality) will cause this event code. 10.XX.40 Genuine HP Supplies Installed Description A genuine HP print cartridge has been installed. ◦ 10.00.40 (event code) Black print cartridge Recommended action No action necessary. 270 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 10.XX.41 Unsupported Supply In Use Description The installed print cartridge is for a different product. ◦ 10.00.41 (event code) Black print cartridge Recommended action Remove the print cartridge, and then install the correct cartridge for this product. TIP: See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct cartridge part number. 10.XX.70 Printing past very low Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low. The actual remaining print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. ◦ 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct cartridge part number. TIP: Advise the customer that HP recommends that they have replacement supplies available to install when the print quality is no longer acceptable. 10.YY.15 Install Description The indicated supply has been removed or installed incorrectly. ◦ 10.00.15 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 10.23.15 Fuser kit ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 271 Recommended action Replace or install the indicated supply. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply or kit part number. 10.YY.35 Incompatible Description The indicated supply is not compatible with this product. ◦ 10.00.35 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 10.23.35 (event code) Fuser Recommended action CAUTION: The fuser might be hot. Be careful when removing the fuser. Install a supply that is designed for this product. See the parts chapter in the service manual for the correct supply part number. 11.00.YY Internal clock error Description The product real time clock has experienced an error. ◦ 01=dead clock ◦ 02=dead real time clock Recommended action Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date at the control panel. If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter. 13.00.00 Description Generic jam event code. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 272 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 13.00.EE Description Unknown door open Recommended action make sure that all of the doors and covers are closed. 13.A3.FF Description Power on jam at the Tray 3 feed sensor. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.D3.DZ Description Late to duplex re-feed jam ◦ 13.D3.D1 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.D2 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.D3 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.D4 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.D5 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.D6 (event code) ◦ 13.D3.DD (event code) ◦ 13.D3.DE (event code) Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.E5.FF Description A power on jam has occurred. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 273 13.EA.EE Description A door jam has occurred. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. Use the component test to isolate a faulty door switch or sensor. 13.EE.FF Description A power on jam has occurred. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.FF.EE Description A door jam has occurred. Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. Use the Manual sensors test or Tray/Bin manual sensors test to isolate a faulty door switch or sensor. 13.FF.FF Description A power on residual paper jam has occurred (sensor). Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. Use the Manual sensors test or Tray/Bin manual sensors test to isolate a faulty door switch or sensor. 13.WX.EE Description This jam occurs when a door is opened during printing. Recommended action Make sure that the doors are fully closed. 274 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 13.WX.FF Description Power on residual paper jam This jam occurs when the paper exists at any of the paper path jam sensors at power on or door close. Due to the current FW timing requirements, the displayed jam code is always 13.FF.FF, only the event log will have 13.WX.FF Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Fuser Area Jam Description A jam in the fuser area has occurred. Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. Make sure media is within specifications, check for obstructions in the fuser, check that the T2 roller is installed properly. 13.WX.YZ Fuser wrap jam Description Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Jam below control panel Description ◦ 13.B2.9Z (event code) Page at duplex switchback jam. Z = the source tray number Recommended action Check the product for a jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Jam in Tray 1 Description ◦ ENWW 13.B2.D1 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 275 Late to registration jam, from Tray 1 This jam occurs when the paper does not reach the TOP sensor in designated amount of time from the start of paper pickup at printing from Tray 1 and duplex printing. Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Jam in Tray Description A misfeed jam has occurred. Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Jam inside envelope feeder Description A jam exists inside the envelope feeder. Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 13.WX.YZ Jam inside top cover Description A jam exists inside the top cover. Recommended action Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. 14.00.XX Description A feed roller error has occurred. 276 ◦ 14.00.01 (event code) ◦ 14.00.02 (event code) ◦ 14.00.03 (event code) ◦ 14.00.04 (event code) ◦ 14.00.05 (event code) ◦ 14.00.06 (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Check the product and accessories feed rollers for dirt or damage. Clean or replace the rollers as necessary. 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a memory error. You might have tried to transfer too many fonts or macros. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), and then simplify the print job or install additional memory. 21.00.00 Page Too Complex Description The page decompression process was too slow for the printer. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue printing (some data might be lost). 32.08.AX Description ◦ 32.08.A1 (event code) Shutdown event ◦ 32.08.A2 (event code) Boot from normal shutdown event ◦ 32.08.A3 (event code) Boot from abnormal shutdown event Recommended action No action necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 277 32.1C.XX Description ◦ 32.1C.01 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore service backup started ◦ 32.1C.02 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore service restore started ◦ 32.1C.03 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore administrator backup started ◦ 32.1C.04 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore administrator restore started ◦ 32.1C.05 (event code) Backup/restore complete ◦ 32.1C.06 (event code) Data model failed to clone job ticket ◦ 32.1C.07 (event code) Backup restore permissions error ◦ 32.1C.08 (event code) Not enough disk space to perform backup/restore or network share issue ◦ 32.1C.09 (event code) Tried to restore a backup file that was not valid for this product ◦ 32.1C.0A (event code) Backup file is invalid ◦ 32.1C.0B (event code) Backup is from newer version of FW than what is currently on the product ◦ 32.1C.0C (event code) Backup cancelled from the HP Embedded Web Server ◦ 32.1C.0D (event code) Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy ◦ 32.1C.0E (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the formatter 278 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ◦ 32.1C.0F (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the finisher firmware ◦ 32.1C.10 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the scanner firmware ◦ 32.1C.11 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the engine ◦ 32.1C.12 (event code) Backup/restore timeout while communicating with the disk ◦ 32.1C.13 (event code) Scheduled backup failure ◦ 32.1C.14 (event code) NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the formatter ◦ 32.1C.15 (event code) NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the finisher firmware ◦ 32.1C.16 (event code) NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the scanner firmware ◦ 32.1C.17 (event code) NVRAM restore timeout while communicating with the engine ◦ 32.1C.18 (event code) Backup of copy subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.19 (event code) Backup of fax subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.1A (event code) Backup of digital send subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.1B (event code) Backup of print subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.1C (event code) Backup of networking subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.1D (event code) Backup of finishing subsystem failed ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 279 ◦ 32.1C.1E (event code) Restore of copy subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.1F (event code) Restore of fax subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.20 (event code) Restore of digital send subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.21 (event code) Restore of print subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.22 (event code) Restore of networking subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.24 (event code) NVRAM backup/restore successful ◦ 32.1C.25 (event code) Reset of copy subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.26 (event code) Reset of fax subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.27 (event code) Reset of digital send subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.28 (event code) Reset of print subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.29 (event code) Reset of networking subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.2A (event code) Reset of finishing subsystem failed ◦ 32.1C.2B (event code) Reset formatter timeout ◦ 32.1C.2C (event code) Reset finisher timeout ◦ 32.1C.2D (event code) Reset scanner timeout 280 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ◦ 32.1C.2E (event code) Reset engine timeout ◦ 32.1C.2F (event code) Reset failure Recommended action ◦ 32.1C.01 (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.02 (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.03 (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.04 (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.05 (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.06 (event code) Retry ◦ 32.1C.07 (event code) Retry ◦ 32.1C.08 (event code) Remove stored jobs and retry Use larger capacity storage device Check network share ◦ 32.1C.09 (event code) Use a valid backup file ◦ 32.1C.0A (event code) Use a valid backup file Reboot and observe state of product Do a partition clean using the Preboot menu. ◦ ENWW 32.1C.0B (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 281 Use a valid backup file or put correct firmware version on the product. ◦ 32.1C.0C (event code) No action necessary ◦ 32.1C.0D (event code) Reboot and then retry the backup/restore ◦ 32.1C.0E (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.0F (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.10 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.11 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.12 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.13 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.14 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.15 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.16 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.17 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.18 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.19 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 282 32.1C.1A (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.1B (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.1C (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.1D (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry ◦ 32.1C.1E (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ◦ 32.1C.1F (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ◦ 32.1C.20 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ◦ 32.1C.21 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ◦ 32.1C.22 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ◦ 32.1C.24 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.25 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ ENWW 32.1C.26 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 283 Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.27 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.28 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.29 (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2A (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2B (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2C (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2D (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2E (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. ◦ 32.1C.2f (event code) Turn the product off then on and retry. 32.21.00 Description Corrupt firmware in external accessory Recommended action Turn the product off, then on, and retry. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu 284 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 33.01.XX Description ◦ 33.01.01 (event code) A restore process has occurred. ◦ 33.01.02 (event code) A save process has occurred. Recommended action No action necessary. 33.XX.YY Used board/disk Description An encrypted board or disk with existing data previously locked to a different product has replaced the original. If you continue, data is permanently lost. Recommended action To save the data on the board or disk, turn the product off. Replace the board or disk with another board or disk. To delete the data on the board or disk and continue, touch the OK button. 40.00.01 USB I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB buffer has overflowed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data (some data might be lost). Check the host configuration. 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a JetDirect buffer overflow. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data (some data might be lost). Check the host configuration. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 285 40.00.05 Embedded I/O bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The USB device has been removed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) Install the USB device. 41.02.00 Error Description A beam detected misprint error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in envelope feeder To use another tray, touch "Options" Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. ◦ Y=0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected. ◦ Y=A Size mismatch. Detected media too long. ◦ Y=B Size mismatch. Detected media too short. ◦ Y=C Size mismatch. Inter-page gap error. ◦ Z=D Source is duplexer ◦ Z=E Source is envelope feeder ◦ 286 Z=2 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Source is Tray 2 ◦ Z=3 Source is Tray 3 ◦ Z=4 Source is Tray 4 ◦ Z=5 Source is Tray 5 Recommended action Make sure that the feeder is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the envelope feeder paper sensor (PS1802) is correctly functioning. If the error persists, replace the envelope feeder. 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in tray Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. ◦ Y=0 Size mismatch. Detected media is longer or shorter than expected. ◦ Y=A Size mismatch. Detected media too long. ◦ Y=B Size mismatch. Detected media too short. ◦ Y=C Size mismatch. Inter-page gap error. ◦ Z=D Source is duplexer ◦ Z=E Source is envelope feeder ◦ Z=1 Source is Tray 1 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 287 ◦ Z=2 Source is Tray 2 ◦ Z=3 Source is Tray 3 ◦ Z=4 Source is Tray 4 ◦ Z=5 Source is Tray 5 Recommended action Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the cassette media switch is correctly functioning. If the error persists, replace the lifter assembly. 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in tray Description The product detected a different paper type than expected. ◦ Y = 0 (expected type) Unknown ◦ Y = 1 (expected type) Normal media ◦ Y = 3 (expected type) LBP OHT ◦ Y = 6 (expected type) Non-assured OHT ◦ Y = 7 (expected type) Heavy media ◦ Y = 8 (expected type) Light media ◦ Y = 9 (expected type) Rough media 288 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ◦ Y = C (expected type) Heavy media 3 ◦ Y = D (expected type) Heavy media 2 ◦ Z = 1 (detected type) Normal media ◦ Z = 3 (detected type) LBP OHT ◦ Z = 6 (detected type) Non-assured OHT ◦ Z = 7 (detected type) Heavy media ◦ Z = 8 (detected type) Light media ◦ Z = 9 (detected type) Rough media ◦ Z = B (detected type) Heavy glossy media (glossy media 2) ◦ Z = C (detected type) Heavy media 3 ◦ Z = D (detected type) Heavy media 2 Recommended action Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available. If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure they match the tray type settings. Clean the Media Sensor. If the error persists, replace the paper pickup assembly. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 289 41.XX.YZ Error To continue, touch “OK” Description A product error has occurred. ◦ XX = error type ◦ Y = fuser mode ◦ Z = input tray ◦ XX = 02 Beam detect misprint ◦ XX = 09 Sub thermistor abnormally high ◦ XX = 18 Scan line inclination adjustment ◦ XX = 20 Image drum HV ◦ Y=2 Normal typed (not AutoSense) ◦ Y = 3) Light media 1, 2, 3: typed or AutoSense ◦ Y=4 Heavy media 1: typed or AutoSense ◦ Z=0 Envelope feeder ◦ Z=1 Tray 1 ◦ Z=2 Tray 2 ◦ Z=3 Tray 3 ◦ Z=4 Tray 4 290 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ◦ Z=5 Tray 5 ◦ Z=6 Tray 6 ◦ Z=D Duplexer Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 42.XX.YY Description Internal system failure Recommended action Turn the product of,f then on, and retry. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.00.XX Description Back channel internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.01.XX Description Image transformer internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 291 47.02.XX Description Job parser internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.03.XX Description Print job internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.04.XX Description Print spooler 9100 internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.05.00 Description Print spooler framework internal error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.06.XX Description Print App internal error 292 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.WX.YZ Printer Calibration Failed To continue, touch “OK” Description The device is unable to access or implement one of the image patterns files. Y = calibration type, Z = event ◦ 47.FC.20 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found at system initialization ◦ 47.FC.21 (event code) Error Diffusion Store image failure ◦ 47.FC.22 (event code) Error Diffusion Image not found ◦ 47.FC.23 Error Diffusion Print engine execution failure ◦ 47.FC.300 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found at system initialization ◦ 47.FC.31 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Store image failure ◦ 47.FC.32 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Image not found ◦ 47.FC.33 (event code) Drum Speed Adjustment Print engine execution failure ◦ 47.FC.40 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found at system initializatione ◦ 47.FC.41 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Store image failure ◦ 47.FC.42 (event code) Pulse Width Modulation Image not found ◦ ENWW 47.FC.43 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 293 Pulse Width Modulation Print engine execution failure Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, reload the firmware. 49.XX.YY To continue turn off then on Description A firmware error has occurred. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error returns, check the following: ● ● 3. The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem. ● Damaged interface cable ● Damaged USB port ● Invalid network configuration setting The error might be caused by the print job. ● Invalid printer driver ● Problem with the software application ● Problem with the file If the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade. 50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on Description The fuser has experienced an error. W = fuser error code, X = fuser mode, Y = previous printer sleep state, Z = next printer sleep state Recommended action W=2 Fuser warm up failure 294 1. Reconnect the connector (J128) between the fuser and the DC controller PCA. 2. Turn the product off. Remove the fuser and then reinstall it. If the error persist, replace the fuser. 3. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW W=3 Low temperature thermistor 1 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J128) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. 2. Reconnect the connector (J82) on the DC controller PCA. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. W = 2: Reconnect the connector (J62) on the low-voltage power supply PCA. 5. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. W=4 High temperature thermistor 1 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J128) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. 2. Reconnect the connector (J82) on the DC controller PCA. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. W=6 Drive circuit fault 1. Check the power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements. NOTE: If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirement of 40 to 70Hz, the fuser temperature control does not work properly and causes this error. 2. Reconnect connectors J51, J52, J53, and J162 and DC controller PCA connectors J85, J95, and J96. 3. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. W = 10 Low temperature thermistor 2 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J128) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. 2. Reconnect the connector (J62) on the low-voltage power supply PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. W = 11 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 295 High temperature thermistor 2 1. Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector (J128) between the fuser and the product. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. 2. Reconnect the connector (J62) on the low-voltage power supply PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. W = 12 Fuser pressure release mechanism failure 1. Reconnect the fuser connector (J128) and the DC controller PCA connector (J62). 2. Check the fuser pressure release sensor flag. If the flag is damaged or not properly working, replace the fuser. 3. Reconnect the fuser motor connector (J221) and the DC controller PCA connector (J89). 4. Use the Component Test item in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser motor. If the motor fails the test, replace the fuser motor. 5. If the error persists replace the fuser. 51.00.YY Error Description Laser/scanner error ◦ YY = 20 Black laser/scanner error Recommended action 1. Reconnect connector (J145) on the laser/scanner. 2. Reconnect connectors (J86 and J93) on the DC controller. 3. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner. 52.XX.00 Error To continue turn off then on Description Laser/scanner error ◦ XX = 00 laser/scanner motor startup error ◦ XX = 20 Laser/scanner rotation error 296 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Reconnect connector (J145) on the laser/scanner. 2. Reconnect connectors (J86 and J93) on the DC controller. 3. Use the scanner motor (M108) drive test in the component test to verify that the scanner motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the laser/scanner. NOTE: Listen for a high pitched whine from the motor. 4. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner. 54.XX.YY Error Description A sensor error has occurred. Recommended action 54.00.03 Environmental sensor (TH3) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then reconnect the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA. Turn the product on. 2. If the environment sensor has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J199) on the environment sensor and the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the environment sensor assembly. 54.06.21 Primary laser/scanner beam detect abnormality ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the product has had parts removed or replace, check the connector (J93) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly. Tools for troubleshooting 297 55.00.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on Description DC controller PCA error ◦ 55.00.01 (event code) DC controller memory error ◦ 55.00.03 (event code DC controller no engine response ◦ 55.00.04 (event code DC controller communications timeout Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 55.0X.YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on Description DC controller PCA error ◦ 55.01.06 (event code) NVRAM memory data error warning ◦ 55.02.06 (event code) NVRAM memory access error warning Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description Optional paper trays communication error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, reseat the optional paper trays (1 x 500-sheet feeder and/or 3 x 500-sheet feeder). Check the input connectors for damage. If a connector is damaged, replace the connector. 298 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 57.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on Description Fan error Recommended action 57.00.03 Main fan (FN101) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the back corner of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the power supply fan (FN101). 2. If the fan has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J64) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the main fan (FN101). 57.00.04 Laser/scanner fan (FN102) failure 1. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J75) on the DC controller PCA. 2. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner fan (FN102). 57.00.06 Cartridge fan (FN301) failure 1. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J95) on the DC controller PCA. 2. If the fan has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J66) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the cartridge fan (FN301). 57.00.05 Cartridge front-side fan (FN103) failure 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the middle back of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the cartridge front-side fan (FN103). 2. If the fan has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J79) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the cartridge front-side fan (FN103). 57.00.07 Duplex fan (FN107) failure ENWW 1. Turn the product off, and then on. Listen for fan noise at the left side of the product. If no noise is heard, replace the duplex fan (FN107). 2. If the fan has been removed or replaced, check the connector (J64) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the duplexer. Tools for troubleshooting 299 58.00.0Y Error To continue turn off then on Description A sensor error has occurred. Recommended action 58.00.05 Environmental sensor (TH3) failure 1. Turn the product off. 2. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the environmental sensor (TH3). 58.00.03 DC controller CPU failure 1. Turn the product off. 2. Check all of the connectors on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 58.00.04 LVPS failure 1. Turn the product off. 2. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J50) on the LVPS, and then check the connector (J85 and J95) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the LVPS. 59.00.YY error To continue turn off then on Description A motor error has occurred. ◦ YY = 00 Paper path malfunction Recommended action 59.00.20 or 59.00.30 300 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Feed motor (M101) failure (start-up or rotational) 1. Reconnect the connector (J191) on the feed motor and the connector (J91) on the DC controller PCA. 2. Use the feed motor (M101) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If is not, replace the feed motor (M101). 59.00.40 or 59.00.50 Fuser motor (M299) failure (start-up or rotational) 1. Reconnect the connector (J221) on the feed motor and the connector (J89) on the DC controller PCA. 2. Use the fuser motor (M299) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the fuser motor (M299). 59.00.60 or 59.00.70 Drum motor (M102) failure (start-up or rotational) 1. Reconnect the connector (J187) on the drum motor and the connector (J87) on the DC controller PCA. 2. Use the drum motor (M102) drive test in the Component test to verify that the motor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the drum motor (M102). 59.A2.0x Error Description A product error has occurred. Recommended action 59.A2.02 or 59.A2.11 Lifter driver assembly Tray 2 failure 1. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the Tray 2 paper (PS107 and PS907) surface sensors are properly functioning. 2. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J73 and J94) on the on the DC controller PCA. 3. Check the media stack surface sensor lever and place it in the correct position to move smoothly. Replace the media stack surface sensor lever if it is damaged. 4. If the error persists, replace the lifter drive assembly (Tray 2). 59.A2.12 to 59.A2.15 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 301 Lifter driver assembly Tray 3 to 6 motor failure 1. Reconnect the connectors (J1605 and J1608) on the paper feeder drive PCA. 2. Reconnect the connectors (J1703 and J1707) on the paper cassette drive PCA. 3. Replace the sheet feeder media stack surface sensor. 4. If the error persists, replace the lifter motor for the specific sheet feeder. 60.00.0Y Tray lifting error Description A tray lift motor error has occurred. Recommended action 60.00.02 Lifter driver assembly Tray 2 failure 1. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the Tray 2 paper (PS107 and PS907) surface sensors are properly functioning. 2. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (J73 and J94) on the on the DC controller PCA. 3. Check the media stack surface sensor level and place it in the correct position to move smoothly. Replace the sensor lever if it is damaged. 4. Replace the media stack surface sensor. 5. If the error persists, replace the lifter drive assembly (Tray 2). 60.00.12 to 60.00.15 Lifter driver assembly Tray 3 failure 1. Use the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the Tray 3 paper (SR1 and SR2) surface sensors are properly functioning. 2. If this part has been removed or replace, check the connector (1605 and 1608) on the on the paper feeder controller PCA. 3. Reconnect the connectors (J1703 and J1707) on the sheet feeder PCA. 4. Replace the sheet feeder media stack surface sensor. 5. If the error persists, replace the lifter drive assembly (Tray 3-6). 62.00.00 No system To continue turn off then on Description Internal system failure 302 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, reload the firmware. If the error still persists, perform a firmware upgrade. If the firmware upgrade does not resolve the problem, replace the hard disk. 65.X0.A1 Output accessory disconnected Description An external paper handling accessory connection has been interrupted. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Make sure that all packing materials have been removed from the paper handling accessory. 3. Check the paper path for obstructions, or jammed paper. 4. Check the accessory cable connection. 5. Turn the product on. If the error persists, replace the accessory. 66.80.YY Stapler/Stacker failure Description An external paper handling accessory error has occurred. ◦ 66.80.01 (event code) Y-align malfunction ◦ 66.80.02 (event code) Jogger malfunction ◦ 66.80.03 (event code) Stapler malfunction ◦ 66.80.21 (event code) Lift up malfunction ◦ 66.80.22 (event code) Lift down malfunction ◦ 66.80.23 (event code) Lift sensor malfunction ◦ ENWW 66.80.33 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 303 Output roller malfunction ◦ 66.80.35 (event code) Self priming malfunction ◦ 66.80.51 (event code) System error (FW error) ◦ 66.80.55 (event code) System error 5 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.56 (event code) System error 6 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.57 (event code) System error 7 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.58 (event code) System error 8 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.59 (event code) System error 9 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.60 (event code) System error 10 (inter-page delay mismatch) ◦ 66.80.61 (event code) System error 11 (lifter task trouble) ◦ 66.80.62 (event code) System error 12 (inter-page delay mismatch) ◦ 66.80.63 (event code) System error 13 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.64 (event code) System error 14 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.65 (event code) System error 15 (FW error) ◦ 66.80.70 (event code) Page-info in flush ◦ 304 66.80.71 (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Flush request in PDLV ◦ 66.80.72 (event code) Delivery notice error ◦ 66.80.73 (event code) Flush request in checking paper path ◦ 66.80.74 (event code) Checking paper path start in PDLV ◦ 66.80.75 (event code) Flush request in flush ◦ 66.80.76 (event code) Non-flush complete Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the paper handling device. 69.11.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description Duplexer error Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the duplexer. 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on Description DC controller failure Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 305 79.XX.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description This error can be caused by corrupted print jobs, software application issues, non-product specific printer drivers, poor-quality USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect network configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. If the error persists, check the following: ● The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting. ● The error might be caused by the print job, an invalid print driver, a problem with the software application, or a problem with the file you are printing. Make sure you are using the correct printer driver. Try printing using a different software application. Try printing a different file or print job. ● Upgrading the product firmware might resolve the problem. 80.0X.YY Embedded JetDirect error Description Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error ◦ 80.01.80 (event code) No heartbeat ◦ 80.01.81 (event code) Reclaim timeout ◦ 80.01.82 (event code) Invalid data length ◦ 80.01.8B (event code) Invalid max outstanding packet header field ◦ 80.01.8C (event code) Invalid channel mapping response ◦ 80.03.01 (event code) No PGP buffers ◦ 306 80.03.02 (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Channel table full ◦ 80.03.03 (event code) Producer index not reset ◦ 80.03.04 (event code) Consumer index not reset ◦ 80.03.05 (event code) Queue position size too small ◦ 80.03.06 (event code) Transport overflow ◦ 80.03.07 (event code) No overflow packets ◦ 80.03.08 (event code) Invalid identify response ◦ 80.03.09 (event code) Invalid channel map return status ◦ 80.03.1080.03.10 (event code) Invalid reclaim return status ◦ 80.03.12 (event code) Datagram invalid buffer ◦ 80.03.13 (event code) Max stream channels ◦ 80.03.14 (event code) Max datagram channels ◦ 80.03.15 (event code) Card reset failed ◦ 80.03.16 (event code) Self test failure ◦ 80.03.17 (event code) Unknown PGP packet ◦ ENWW 80.03.18 (event code) Tools for troubleshooting 307 Duplicate I/O channel. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the formatter. 81.YY.ZZ EIO-1 Card Failure Description An EIO error has occurred. ◦ 81.01.80 (event code) No heartbeat ◦ 81.01.81 (event code) Reclaim timeout ◦ 81.01.82 (event code) Invalid data length ◦ 81.01.8B (event code) Invalid max outstanding ◦ 81.01.8C (event code) Invalid channel mapping ◦ 81.03.01 (event code) No PGP buffers ◦ 81.03.02 (event code) Channel table full ◦ 81.03.03 (event code) Producer index not reset ◦ 81.03.04 (event code) Consumer index not reset ◦ 81.03.05 (event code) Queue position size ◦ 81.03.06 (event code) Transport overflow ◦ 308 81.03.07 (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW No overflow packets ◦ 81.03.08 (event code) Invalid identify response ◦ 81.03.09 (event code) Invalid channel map return ◦ 81.03.10 (event code) Invalid reclaim return status ◦ 81.03.12 (event code) Datagram invalid buffer ◦ 81.03.13 (event code) Max stream channels ◦ 81.03.14 (event code) Max datagram channels ◦ 81.03.15 (event code) Card reset failed ◦ 81.03.16 (event code) Self test failure ◦ 81.03.17 (event code) Unknown PGP packet ◦ 81.03.18 (event code) Duplicate I/O channel Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. If the error persists, replace the EIO device.. 82.73.46 OR 82.73.47 Description A hard disk or compact flash disk cleaning failed. Usually caused by a failure of the disk hardware. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 309 Recommended action 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. Reload the firmware. 98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the solutions volume Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. Reload the firmware. 98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the configuration volume Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. Reload the firmware. 98.00.04 Corrupt data in job data volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the job data volume 310 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Rerun the file erase function. 99.00.01 Upgrade not performed file is corrupt Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. CRC error in the firmware image (bad image). Recommended action Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 99.00.02 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. I/O timeout when reading header number and size. Indicates a problem with the network environment, not the device. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good connection to the device and attempt the upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Disk error. May indicate a problem or a hard disk failure. It might be necessary to check the connection to the hard disk or replace the hard disk. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, perform the Clean Disk process. You will then need to download firmware from the Preboot menu. 3. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.04 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 311 I/O timeout when reading rest of header. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good connection to the device and attempt the upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.05 Upgrade not performed timeout during receive Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. I/O timeout when reading image data. Recommended action The most common cause is an issue with the network environment. Make sure that there is a good connection to the device and attempt the upgrade again, or upgrade using the USB walk-up port. 99.00.06 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading header number and size. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading rest of header. Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading image data. 312 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. 2. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.09 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The RFU was canceled by the user. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.10 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Job canceled when reading header number and size. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.11 Upgrade canceled by user Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Job canceled when reading rest of header. Recommended action Resend the RFU. 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Header number is 1 but header size doesn’t match version 1 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 313 99.00.13 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Header number is 2 but header size doesn’t match version 2 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. 99.00.14 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. The file is invalid. Recommended action Download the RFU file again. Make sure that you download the file for the correct product model. Resend the RFU. 99.00.2X Description ◦ 99.00.20 (event log) The bundle is not for this product ◦ 99.00.21 (event log) The bundle is not signed with the correct signature, or the signature is invalid ◦ 99.00.22 (event log) The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware ◦ 99.00.23 (event log) The package header version is not supported by this firmware ◦ 99.00.24 (event log) ◦ The format of the bundle is invalid ◦ 99.00.25 (event log) The format of the package is invalid ◦ 314 99.00.26 (event log) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW A CRC32 check did not pass ◦ 99.00.27 (event log) An I/O error occurred while downloading the bundle Recommended action Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com/go/lj600Series_firmware, and then resend the firmware upgrade. 99.00.27 only: Turn the product off, and then on again. Resend the firware upgrade. If the error persists, try the sending the upgrade by another method (USB or Embedded Web Server). 99.09.60 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product. Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product. 99.09.61 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The installed disk is installed in a product configured for a encrypted hard disk. Recommended action Access the Preboot menu and then select Lock Disk to lock the disk. 99.09.62 Unknown disk Description Preboot menu error. The installed disk was previously locked in another product. Recommended action Install a new disk or use the Preboot menu to unlock this disk. If the disk is to be reused in a different product, execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, then reload firmware and lock the disk. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 315 99.09.63 Incorrect disk Description A new or blank disk has been installed in a device which previously had an encrypted disk. Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk and then lock it to this product. 99.09.64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure has occurred. Recommended action Replace the hard disk drive. 99.09.65 Disk data error Description Disk data corruption has occurred. Recommended action Execute the Clean Disk procedure from the Preboot menu, and then resend the RFU. 99.09.66 No disk installed Description A disk drive is not installed in the product. Recommended action Install a compatible hard disk drive. 99.09.67 Disk is not bootable please download firmware Description The product has a non-secure disk (solid state disk) installed as the boot disk, and it has been replaced with a new service part. A new firmware image needs to be downloaded to the device. Recommended action 316 1. Press any key to continue to the main Preboot menu. 2. Press the Help button to see the help text for the error. 3. Select the Administrator menu. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the password displays. 4. Select the Download item. 5. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 99.XX.YY Description Firmware installation error Recommended action Reload the firmware. full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full. Recommended action Empty the bin to continue printing. low OR Supplies low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. ◦ 10.00.60 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 10.23.60 (event code) Fuser Kit Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 317 very low OR Supplies very low Description The product indicates when a supply level, or more than one supply, is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. When multiple supplies are low, more than one event code is recorded. ◦ 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 10.23.70 (event code) Fuser Kit Recommended action If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the supply. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. [File System] device failure To clear press “OK” Description The specified device has failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] file operation failure To clear press “OK” Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] file system is full To clear press “OK” Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full. 318 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. [File System] is not initialized Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. [File System] is write protected Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Press the OK button to clear the error. Accept bad signature Description The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade, and the code signature is invalid. Recommended action Download the correct firmware upgrade file for this product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the product user guide for more information. Bad optional tray connection Description The optional tray is not connected, not connected correctly, or a connection is not working correctly. Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove and then reinstall the optional tray. 3. Reconnect connectors for the tray. 4. If the problem continues, replace the connector for the tray. Tools for troubleshooting 319 Canceling Description The product is canceling the current job. Recommended action No action is necessary. Canceling... Description The product is canceling the current job . Recommended action No action is necessary. Cartridge Low Description This message appears even though the print cartridge is new. Recommended action 1. Remove, and then reinstall the print cartridge. 2. Make sure a genuine HP supply is used. 3. If the error persists, replace the print cartridge. Cartridge Memory Abnormal Description This message appears even though the print cartridge is new. Recommended action 1. Remove, and then reinstall the print cartridge. 2. Reconnect connector (J74) on the DC controller PCA. 3. If the error persists, replace the print cartridge. Cartridge Out Description This message appears even though the print cartridge is new. 320 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Remove, and then reinstall the print cartridge. 2. Make sure a genuine HP supply is used. 3. If the error persists, replace the print cartridge. Checking engine Description The product is conducting an internal test. Recommended action No action is necessary. Checking paper path Description The product is checking for possible paper jams. Recommended action No action is necessary. Chosen personality not available To continue, touch “OK” Description A print job requested a product language (personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory. Recommended action Print the job by using a print driver for a different language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Cleaning do not grab paper Description The product is performing an automatic cleaning cycle. Printing will continue after the cleaning is complete. Recommended action No action is necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 321 Cleaning... Description The product is performing an automatic cleaning cycle. Printing will continue after the cleaning is complete. Recommended action No action is necessary. Clearing event log Description This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The product exits the menus when the event log has been cleared. Recommended action No action is necessary. Clearing paper path Description The product is attempting to eject jammed paper. Recommended action Check progress at the bottom of the display. Close stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door Description This message appears even though the stapler/stacker multi bin mailbox door is closed. Recommended action 1. Reconnect the connector (J465) on the stapler/stacker controller PCA. 2. Check the stapler/stacker door sensor flag. If the flag is damaged, replace the sensor flag. Close top cover Description This message appears even though the top cover is closed. 322 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Verify that the switch (SW101) is properly functioning (open and close the top cover). If the switch fails the test, replace the switch. 2. Make sure that the switch flag—at the right-side of the top cover assembly, behind the controlpanel display— is not damaged or missing. If the flag is damaged or missing, replace the top cover assembly. 3. Reconnect the connector (J78) on the DC controller PCA. 4. If the problem persists, replace the top cover switch (SW101). Cooling device Description The product is cooling. Recommended action No action is necessary. Creating cleaning page... Description A cleaning page is being generated. Recommended action No action is necessary. Data received To print last page press “OK” Description The product is waiting for the command to print the last page. Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the last page of the job. Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log. Recommended action No action is necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 323 Expected drive missing Description The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive. Recommended action Install the encrypted hard drive. External device initializing Description An external device is initializing. Recommended action No action necessary. Face Down Tray Full Description This message is displaying even though the tray is not full. Recommended action 1. Check the face down tray media full sensor flag and place it in the correct position to move smoothly. Replace sensor flag if damaged. 2. Use the Output bin full sensor (PS104) test in the Manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning. If it is not, replace the sensor (PS104). 3. Reconnect the connector (J176) at face down tray media full sensor and DC controller PCA (J76). 4. Reconnect the connector (J176) at face down tray media full sensor and DC controller PCA (J76). FIM Load Error Send full FIM on port Description The product displays this message before the firmware is loaded at startup if an error has occurred during a firmware upgrade. Recommended action Resend the firmware upgrade. Fuser Kit low Description 10.23.60 (event code) 324 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW The product indicates when a supply is low. Recommended action Replace the fuser. NOTE: After replacing the fuser, reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset Supplies sub-menu. Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK” Description 10.23.70 (event code) The product indicates when a supply is very low. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended. Recommended action Replace the fuser. NOTE: After replacing the fuser, reset the fuser page counter by selecting New Fuser Kit in the Reset Supplies sub-menu. Genuine HP cartridge installed Description A new HP print cartridge has been installed. The message appears for about 6 seconds before the product returns to the Ready state. Recommended action No action necessary. Genuine HP supply installed Description 10.XX.40 (event code) A new genuine HP print cartridge has been installed. Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message. HP Secure hard drive disabled Description The drive has been encrypted for another product. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 325 Recommended action Remove the drive or use the Embedded Web Server for more information. Incompatible Description The indicated supply is not compatible with this product. ◦ 10.00.35 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ Fuser kit 10.23.35 (event code) Recommended action Replace the supply with one that is designed for this product. Incompatible supplies Description Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed. Event codes are supply specific. Recommended action Touch the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies. Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this product. Initializing... Description The product is starting. Recommended action No action necessary. Install fuser unit Description The fuser has been removed or installed incorrectly. 326 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Turn the product off, and then wait for the fuser to cool before handling it. 1. Remove the output bin or stapler/stacker. 2. Remove the fuser entrance guide. 3. Remove the fuser. Install supplies Description More than one supply is missing or is installed incorrectly. Recommended action Touch the OK button to identify the supplies that need to be replaced. Touch the OK button a second time for more information about the specific supply. Insert the supply or make sure it is correctly installed and fully seated. Install supply Description A supply item is either not installed or installed incorrectly. ◦ Black cartridge 10.00.15 (event code) Recommended action Install the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated. Internal disk device failure To clear press “OK” Description The internal disk failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk file operation failed Description A PJL system command attempted to perform an illogical operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 327 Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk file system is full Description A PJL system command attempted to write data to the internal disk but was unsuccessful because the disk is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk is write protected Description The internal disk is write protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. Internal disk not found Description The internal disk was not found at start up. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Internal disk not functional Description 82.0X.YY (event code) The internal hard drive is not correctly functioning. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove and then reinstall the hard drive. If the error persists, replace the internal hard drive. Internal disk not initialized Description The internal disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. 328 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Initialize the internal disk file system. Internal disk spinning up Description Internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. Recommended action No action is necessary. Job not stapled due to mixed sizes Description This message is displayed when the job to staple has more than one paper size (paper width). Recommended action Paper with different widths cannot be stapled. Use the same width paper for the entire print job. Load Tray : [Type], [Size] Description This message appears even though there is media loaded in the tray. Recommended action Use the sensor tests to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning. Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: ENWW ◦ MP tray: connector (J191) on the MP tray media feed sensor and the connector (J91) on the DC controller PCA. ◦ Printer cassette: connectors (J22) on the cassette media feed sensor and the connector (J1605) on the DC controller PCA. ◦ 1 X 500-sheet paper feeder cassette: connector (J32) on the paper feeder cassette media feed sensor and the connector (J1602) on the paper feeder controller PCA. ◦ Paper deck cassette 1: connector (J32) on the paper deck cassette 1 media feed sensor and connector (J1602) on the paper deck controller PCA 1 ◦ Paper deck cassette 2: connector (J13) on the paper deck cassette 2 media feed sensor and connector (J1607) on the paper deck controller PCA 2. ◦ Paper deck cassette 3: connector (J13) on the paper deck cassette 3 media feed sensor and connector (J607) on the paper deck controller PCA 3. Tools for troubleshooting 329 Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To use another tray, press “OK” Description This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires. Recommended action Load the correct paper in the tray. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray. Loading program Description Programs and fonts can be stored on the product’s file system and are loaded into RAM when the product is turned on. The number specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded. Recommended action No action necessary. NOTE: Do not turn the product off. Manually feed output stack Then touch "OK" to print second side Description The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side. Recommended action 1. Maintaining the same orientation, remove pages from the output bin. 2. Flip document printed side up. 3. Load document in Tray 1. 4. Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job. Manually feed: Description This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are empty. 330 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Load tray with requested paper. If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print. To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button. Manually feed: To use another tray, press “OK” Description This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is loaded, and other trays are available. Recommended action Load tray with requested paper. If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print. To use another tray, clear paper from Tray 1, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the OK button. Moving solenoid Description The solenoid is moving as part of a component test. Recommended action To exit press Moving solenoid and motor Description The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test. Recommended action To exit press No job to cancel Description You have pressed the stop button but the product is not actively processing any jobs. Recommended action No action necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 331 NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED Description 10.99.31 (event code) This message is displayed for about 6 seconds when a new non HP supply is installed. Recommended action If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Output Bin Full Description This message appears even though the output bin is not full. Recommended action 1. Make sure that the output bin sensor flag is not damaged and can move freely. If the flag is damaged, replace the flag. 2. Use the output bin full sensor (PS104) test in the Manual sensor test to test the sensor. If it does not respond, replace the output bin full sensor (PS104). 3. Reconnect connector (J76) on the DC controller PCA. Paused… Description The product is paused, and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues receiving data until memory is full. Recommended action Press the Stop button . Performing Paper Path Test… Description A paper-path test is being performed. Recommended action No action necessary. Please Wait... Description The product is in the process of clearing data. 332 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Configuration... Description The product is printing the Configuration page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Event Log... Description The product is printing the Event Log page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing File Directory... Description The product is printing the File Directory pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Font List... Description The product is printing the Font List pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Fuser Test Page... Description The product is printing the Fuser Test page. Recommended action No action necessary. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 333 Printing Help Page... Description The product is printing the Help page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Menu Map... Description The product is printing the Menu Map pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Registration Page… Description The product is printing the Registration pages. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing stopped Description Time has expired on the Print/Stop test. Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue. Printing Supplies Status Page... Description The product is printing the Supplies Status page. Recommended action No action necessary. Printing Usage Page... Description The product is printing the Usage page. 334 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action No action necessary. Printing…engine test Description The product is printing an engine test page. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing duplex job Do not grab paper until job completes Description Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. CAUTION: Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin. The message disappears when the job is finished. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing job from tray ... Do not grab paper until job completes Description The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing... Description The product is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins, this message is replaced by a message that indicates the tray the job is using. Recommended action No action necessary. Processing... copy of Description The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy number of total copies is currently being processed. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 335 Recommended action No action necessary. RAM disk device failure To clear press “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to remove the message. RAM disk file operation failed To clear press “OK” Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an illegal operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk file system is full To clear press “OK” Description The hard disk is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk is write protected To clear press “OK” Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. RAM disk not initialized Description The RAM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Initialize the RAM disk file system. 336 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. Recommended action No action necessary. Ready Description The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display. The product IP address displays. Recommended action No action necessary. Receiving Upgrade Description The product is receiving a firmware upgrade. Recommended action Do not turn the product off until it reaches the Ready state. Remove one print cartridge Description The product is testing the print-cartridge motor. Recommended action To perform the test, remove the print cartridge. To cancel the test, press the Stop button . To exit press Remove USB accessory Description This message displays when an unsupported USB device is inserted into a host USB port on the product. Recommended action Remove the unsupported USB device. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 337 Replace Description This alert appears only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low threshold. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The product can be configured to stop when the supply level is very low. The supply might still be able to produce acceptable print quality. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends. ◦ 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 10.23.70 (event code) Fuser Kit Recommended action Replace the specified supply. Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu. Replace supplies Description This alert appears only if the product is configured to stop when a supply reaches the very low threshold. The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends. Recorded event codes depend on which supplies are at the end of life. ◦ 10.00.70 (event code) Black print cartridge ◦ 338 10.23.70 (event code) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Fuser Kit Recommended action Touch the OK button to find out which supplies need to be replaced. Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu. Resend external accessory firmware Description An external accessory requires a firmware upgrade. Printing can continue, but jams might occur if the job uses the external accessory. Recommended action Perform a firmware upgrade. Resend Upgrade Description A firmware upgrade did not complete successfully. Recommended action Upgrade the firmware again. Restore Factory Settings Description The product is restoring factory settings. Recommended action No action necessary. ROM disk device failed To clear press “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk file operation failed To clear press “OK” Description A PJL command was received that attempted to perform an illegal operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 339 Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk file system is full To clear press “OK” Description The hard disk is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk is write protected To clear press “OK” Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. ROM disk not initialized To clear press “OK” Description The ROM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Initialize the ROM disk file system. Rotating Motor Description The product is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor. Recommended action Press the Stop button when ready to stop this test. To exit press Size Mis-Match Description This message appears even though the correct size paper is loaded in the correct paper tray. 340 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1. Use the Tray 2 size switch (SW102) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to test the switch. If it does not respond, replace the lifter drive assembly. 2. Reconnect connector (J122) on the Tray 2 media size switch, and then reconnect connector (J72) on the DC controller. 3. If the error persists, replace the lifter drive assembly. Size mismatch in Tray Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray. Recommended action 1. Load the correct paper. 2. Verify the paper is positioned correctly. 3. Close the tray, and then verify that the control panel lists the correct size and type for the specified tray. 4. If necessary, use the control-panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray. Sleep mode on Description The product is in sleep mode. Pressing a control-panel button, receiving of a print job, or an error condition clears this message. Recommended action No action necessary. Staple Cartridge low Description The product indicates when a supply level is low. 20 to 50 staples remain in the cartridge. Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge. Staple Cartridge very low Description The product staple cartridge is at end of life. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 341 NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty ends. Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge. Stapler/Stacker staple jam Description A stapler/stacker jam exists. Recommended action 13.89.33 Clear the jam. See the clear jams section in the service manual. Supplies low Description Multiple supplies on the product have reached the User defined low threshold. Recommended action Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable. SUPPLY MEMORY WARNING Description The product cannot read or write to the e-label or the e-label is missing. Recommended action No action necessary. The unit has corrupt data Description 98.00.0X (event code) Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume ◦ 98.00.01 Corrupt data in the firmware volume ◦ 98.00.02 Corrupt data in the solutions volume ◦ 342 98.00.03 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Corrupt data in the configuration volume ◦ 98.00.04 Corrupt data in the job data volume Recommended action ◦ ◦ 98.00.01 or 98.00.02 or 98.00.03 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Use the Clean Disk item in the Preboot menu. 3. Reload the firmware. 98.00.04 1. Turn the product off, and then on again. 2. Run the file erase function. Tray empty: [Type], [Size] Description The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print. ◦ X=1 Tray 1 ◦ X=2 Tray 2 ◦ X=3 Tray 3 ◦ X=4 Tray 4 ◦ X=5 Tray 5 Recommended action Refill the tray at a convenient time. NOTE: This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock and then load the tray. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 343 Tray lifting Description The product is in the process of lifting paper in the indicated tray. ◦ X=2 Tray 2 ◦ X=3 Tray 3 ◦ X=4 Tray 4 ◦ X=5 Tray 5 Recommended action No action necessary. Tray open Description The specified tray is open or not closed completely. ◦ X=2 Tray 2 ◦ X=3 Tray 3 ◦ X=4 Tray 4 ◦ X=5 Tray 5 Recommended action Close the tray. NOTE: If this message appears after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. If the error persists, use the Media size switches (SW102, SW2 , SW3, ) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to test the switches. If they do not respond, replace associated the lifter drive assembly. 344 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Tray overfilled Description The tray is filled above the stack-height mark. ◦ X=2 Tray 2 ◦ X=3 Tray 3 ◦ X=4 Tray 4 ◦ X=5 Tray 5 Recommended action Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray. NOTE: If this message appears after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. Type mismatch Tray Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type. Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays. 1. Load the correct paper in the specified tray. 2. At the control panel, verify the type configuration. Unsupported drive installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported hard drive has been installed. The drive is unusable by this product. Recommended action ENWW 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the hard drive. 3. Turn the product on. Tools for troubleshooting 345 Unsupported supply in use OR Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description A non-supported supply has been installed. OR The print cartridge is for a different HP product. ◦ XX = 00 Black print cartridge Recommended action Install the correct supplies for this product. See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part numbers. Unsupported tray configuration Description The product has too many optional trays installed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the unsupported trays, and then turn the product on. Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non-supported USB accessory has been installed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. Upgrade Error Description 30.01.36 (event code) SCB upgrade error Recommended action 346 1. Turn the product off, and then on. 2. Resend the upgrade. 3. If the error persists, replace the SCB. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW USB accessory not functional Description A parameter in the USB accessory is not correctly functioning. Recommended action 1. Turn the product off. 2. Remove the USB accessory. 3. Insert a replacement USB accessory. USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly Description Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available. Recommended action Remove the USB hub. USB is write protected To clear press “OK” Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error. USB needs too much power Description Power requirements for the USB device attached to the product are beyond supported limits. Recommended action Remove the USB device and then turn the product off and then on again. Try a similar accessory that has its own power supply or requires less power. USB needs too much power Remove USB and Then Turn Off then On Description A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. Use a USB accessory that uses less power or that contains its own power supply. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 347 USB not initialized Description The USB device file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the EWS or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component. USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for about 6 seconds after a USB device is removed. Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message. USB storage device failure To clear press “OK” Description The specified device failed. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. USB storage file operation failed To clear press “OK” Description A PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illegal operation, such as downloading a file to a non-existent directory. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. USB storage file system is full To clear press “OK” Description The file system on the installed USB device is full. Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear this error. 348 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” OR Used supply in use Description One of the print cartridges has been previously used. ◦ XX = 00 Black print cartridge Recommended action If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit. Waiting for tray to lift Description The specified tray is in the process of lifting paper to the top of the tray (so it can properly feed). Recommended action No action necessary Windows Login Required to Use this Feature Description Windows login required. Recommended action Enter your windows login. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 349 Event-log messages This section describes messages that only appear in the event log. For additional numeric messages, see the control-panel message section of this manual Figure 3-38 Sample event log HP LaserJet 600 M603 1 Event Log Page Page 1 2 3 350 4 5 1 Product information 2 Event number 3 Date and time 4 Engine cycles 5 Event log code 6 Firmware version number 7 Description of personality 8 Consecutive Repeats Chapter 3 Solve problems 6 7 ENWW Print an event log NOTE: Printing an event log by using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. To print a complete event log, use the Service menu. Print the event log from the Administration menu 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting Scroll to the Print Event Log item, and then press the OK button. Print the event log from the Service menu 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Service The PIN for the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer is 10060111, 10060211, or 10060311 depending on your model. 3. ENWW Scroll to the Print Event Log item, and then press the OK button. Tools for troubleshooting 351 View an event log NOTE: Viewing an event log by using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. To print a complete event log, use the Service menu. View an event log from the Administration menu 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Administration ● Troubleshooting Scroll to the View Event Log item, and then press the OK button. Viewing the event log from the Service menu 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Service The PIN for the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer is 10060111, 10060211, or 10060311 depending on your model. 3. Scroll to the View Event Log item, and then press the OK button. Clear an event log Clearing the event log from the Service menu 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Service The PIN for the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer is 10060111, 10060211, or 10060311 depending on your model. 3. 352 Scroll to the Clear Event Log item, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams The product closely monitors the paper path for jams. The product displays a jam error message when one of the following conditions occurs. ● Paper is detected at a paper path sensor when paper is not expected. ● Paper fails to clear a sensor within a specified time period. ● Paper fails to arrive at a sensor within a specified time period. If the product is experiencing frequent jams, use the following steps to assist you in resolving the causes of the jam. ● Review the event log to determine a cause for the jams. ● Inspect each of the paper path sensors to determine if the sensor flags are free from obstructions and functioning correctly. See Component diagnostics on page 199. ● Use the manual sensor diagnostic test to determine if all paper path motors and solenoids are functioning correctly. ● The sensors below monitor the product paper path. ● PS102, pre-feed sensor ● PS103, top-of-page sensor ● PS106, media-width sensor ● PS108, media-width sensor ● PS700, fusing delivery sensor ● PS1603, optional 500-sheet feeder media path sensors ● PS1502, duplex sensor ● PS1704, optional 1,500-sheet feeder media path sensors NOTE: To locate the sensors listed above, see Paper path sensors test (automatic) on page 206. ENWW Clear jams 353 Jam locations If a jam message appears on the control-panel display, look for jammed paper or other print media in the locations that are indicated in the following illustration. Then follow the procedure for clearing the jam. You might need to look for paper in other locations than those that are indicated in the jam message. If the location of the jam is not obvious, look first in the top-cover area underneath the print cartridge. When clearing jams, be very careful not to tear jammed paper. If a small piece of paper is left in the product, it could cause additional jams. 6 1 5 2 4 3 1 Top-cover and print-cartridge areas 2 Optional envelope feeder 3 Tray areas (Tray 1, Tray 2, and optional trays) 4 Optional duplexer 5 Fuser area 6 Output areas (top bin; rear bin; and optional stacker, stapler/stacker, or 5-bin mailbox) NOTE: Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam and cause temporary print-quality problems. These problems should clear up within a few pages. 354 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Common causes of jams Many jams are caused by using paper that does not meet HP specifications. For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet products, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide. The product is jammed.1 Cause Solution The paper does not meet specifications. Use only paper that meets HP specifications. A component is installed incorrectly. Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit, and the fuser are correctly installed. You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier. Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied. A tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove any excess paper from the tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray. The paper is skewed. The tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it. The paper is binding or sticking together. Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the paper into the tray. NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can create static electricity, which can cause paper to stick together. 1 ENWW The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed. Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. The paper is in poor condition. Replace the paper. The internal rollers from the tray are not picking up the paper. Remove the top sheet of paper. If the paper is too heavy, it might not be picked from the tray. The paper has rough or jagged edges. Replace the paper. The paper is perforated or embossed. Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed single sheets from Tray 1. Product supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the product control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies. Paper was not stored correctly. Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment. If the product continues to jam, contact HP Customer Support or your authorized HP service provider. Clear jams 355 Clear jams from the input trays Use these procedures to clear jams from the trays. Clear jams from Tray 1 Slowly pull the jammed paper or other print media out of the product. If part of the paper has already been pulled into the product, see Clear jams from the print-cartridge (top cover) on page 373. Clear jams from Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray 356 1. Slide the tray out of the product, lift it slightly, and remove any damaged paper from the tray. 2. If the edge of the jammed paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper down and out of the product. (Do not pull the paper straight out, or it will tear.) If the paper is not visible, look in the next tray or in the top-cover area. See Clear jams from the print-cartridge (top cover) on page 373. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 3. Make sure that the paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and below the maximum-height indicators. 4. Slide the tray into the product. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. Clear jams from the optional 1,500-sheet tray 1. ENWW Open the front door of the tray. Clear jams 357 358 2. If the edge of the jammed paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper down and out of the product. (Do not pull the paper straight out, or it will tear.) If the paper is not visible, look in the top-cover area. 3. Make sure that the paper does not exceed the fill marks on the paper guides, and that the front edge of the stack is aligned with the arrows. 4. Close the front door of the tray. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the optional duplexer ENWW 1. Lift the optional duplexer up and then pull it out to remove it. 2. Remove any paper that is on top of Tray 2. (You might need to reach inside the product.) 3. Slowly pull any paper out of the optional duplexer. Clear jams 359 360 4. Insert the optional duplexer into the product. 5. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for jam in another location. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the optional envelope feeder This procedure applies only to jams that occur when you are using an optional envelope feeder. 1. Remove any envelopes that are loaded in the optional envelope feeder. Lower the envelope weight and lift the tray extension up, to the closed position. 2 3 1 2. Grasp both sides of the optional envelope feeder and carefully lift it up, and then pull it out of the product. 3. Slowly remove any jammed envelopes from the optional envelope feeder and the product. 1 2 ENWW Clear jams 361 362 4. Reinstall the envelope feeder. 5. Press OK to clear the jam message. 6. If a jam message persists, an envelope is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. 7. Replace the envelopes, making sure that you push the bottom envelopes in slightly further than the top envelopes. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the output areas Use these procedures to clear jams that occur in the rear output bin or in the optional stacker, stapler/ stacker, or 5-bin mailbox. Clear jams from the rear output bin 1. Open the rear output bin. NOTE: If most of the paper is still inside the product, it might be easier to remove it through the top-cover area. 2. Grasp both sides of the paper, and slowly pull the paper out of the product. Loose toner might be on the sheet. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or into the product. NOTE: If the jammed paper is difficult to remove, try opening the top cover all the way to release pressure on the paper. If the sheet has torn, or if you still cannot remove it, see Clear jams from the fuser on page 369. ENWW Clear jams 363 3. Close the rear output bin. 4. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. Clear jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker Paper jams can occur in the optional stacker or the optional stapler/stacker. Staple jams can occur only in the optional stapler/stacker. Clear paper jams from the optional stacker or stapler/stacker 1. 364 At the back of the product, open the door on the stacker or stapler/stacker, and open the rear output bin. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 2. Carefully remove any jammed paper. 3. Close the door on the stacker or stapler/stacker, and close the rear output bin. 4. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed. Look for it in another location. Check the front of the accessory and carefully remove any jammed paper. NOTE: The output bin must be pushed down into the lowest position for printing to continue. Clear staple jams from the optional stapler/stacker 1. ENWW On the right side of the stapler/stacker, turn the stapler unit toward the front of the product until the unit clicks into the open position. Pull outward on the blue staple cartridge to remove it. Clear jams 365 2. Rotate the green cover on the end of the staple cartridge upward, and remove the jammed staple. 3. Insert the staple cartridge into the stapler unit, and rotate the stapler unit toward the rear of the product until the unit snaps into place. The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents might not be stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or is out of staples, the job will still print as long as the path to the stacker bin is not blocked. 366 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the optional 5-bin mailbox ENWW 1. Remove any paper that is in the output bins. 2. On the back of the 5-bin mailbox, open the jam-access door. 3. If the paper is jammed at the top of the 5-bin mailbox, pull it straight down to remove it. Clear jams 367 368 4. If the paper is jammed at the bottom of the 5-bin mailbox, open the rear output bin, and then pull straight up on the paper to remove it. 5. Close the jam-access door and the rear output bin. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the fuser Use this procedure only in these situations: ● Paper has jammed inside the fuser and cannot be removed from the top-cover area or the rearoutput area. ● A sheet of paper has torn while you were trying to clear a jam from the fuser. 1. Turn the product off and unplug the power cord from the product. 1 2 WARNING! The fuser is very hot. To avoid minor burns, wait 30 minutes for the fuser to cool before removing it from the product. 2. ENWW Rotate the product so the rear is facing you. If an optional duplexer is installed, lift it and pull it straight out. Set it aside. Clear jams 369 3. Open the rear output bin. 4. Remove the rear output bin. Place your finger near the left-side hinge, and push firmly to the right until the hinge-pin clears the hole inside the product. Rotate the output bin outward to remove it. 5. If paper is visible, remove it. If paper is not visible, push up on the two blue levers on the sides of the fuser, and pull the fuser straight out. 370 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 6. Remove the jammed paper. If necessary, lift the black plastic guide that is located on the top of the fuser to gain access to the jammed sheet. CAUTION: Do not use a sharp or metal object to clear paper from the fuser area. You might damage the fuser. ENWW 7. Push the fuser firmly into the product until the blue levers on both sides click into place. 8. Reinstall the rear output bin. Insert the right hinge-pin into the hole inside the product. Push inward on the left hinge, and slide it into the hole inside the product. Close the rear output bin. Clear jams 371 9. Plug the power cord into the product. 10. Replace the optional duplexer, if it was removed. 11. Turn the product on. 12. If a jam message persists, a sheet is still jammed in the product. Look for the jam in another location. After clearing all jams, you need to send the print job again because the product power has been turned off. 372 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams from the print-cartridge (top cover) 1. Open the top cover and remove the print cartridge. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover the print cartridge with a sheet of paper while it is outside of the product. ENWW 2. Use the green handle to lift the paper-access plate. Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product. Do not tear the paper. If paper is difficult to remove, try clearing it from the tray area. 3. Open Tray 1 and remove the envelope accessory cover. If paper is present, remove it. Clear jams 373 4. Rotate the paper guide to check for additional jammed paper underneath. If jammed paper is present, remove it. 2 1 5. Replace the envelope accessory cover and close Tray 1. 1 374 2 6. Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover. 7. If a jam message persists, jammed paper is still in the product. Look for the jam in another location. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Change jam recovery This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are available: ● Auto — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when enough memory is available. This is the default setting. ● Off — The product does not try to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal. NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost. ● On — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer. Set the jam recovery feature ENWW 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● General Settings ● Jam Recovery 3. Scroll to the appropriate setting, and then press the OK button. 4. Press the Home button to return to the Ready state. Clear jams 375 Paper does not feed automatically ● The product does not pick up paper ● The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ● Prevent paper jams The product does not pick up paper If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions. 1. Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper. 2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job. 3. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray. 4. Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue. The product picks up multiple sheets of paper If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions. 1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray. 2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. 3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package. 4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray. 5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it. Prevent paper jams To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions. 376 1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. 2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package. 3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on. 4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ENWW 5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it. 6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product. 7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time. Paper does not feed automatically 377 Use manual print modes Try the following multi-purpose (MP) modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. To access the manual print modes, open the following menus: ● Administration ● General Settings ● Print Quality ● Adjust Paper Types Table 3-34 MP modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu Print Mode ● NORMAL MODE ● HEAVY MODE ● SHELF EDGE MODE 2 ● CARDSTOCK MODE ● TRANSPARENCY MODE ● ENVELOPE MODE ● LABEL MODE ● LIGHT MODE ● EXTRA LIGHT MODE ● ROUGH MODE ● HEAVY GLOSSY MODE ● HEAVY ROUGH MODE ● BOND MODE NOTE: types. RESISTANCE MODE 378 Chapter 3 Solve problems Not all print modes are available for all paper Set to Up to resolve print-quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low-humidity environments with resistive or rough surface media. ENWW Table 3-34 MP modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu (continued) HUMIDITY MODE With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film. With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job. With all other paper types, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job. FUSER TEMP MODE If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page, first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings. Try the ALTERNATE 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try ALTERNATE 2 and then ALTERNATE 3. Using the ALTERNATE 2 and ALTERNATE 3 settings might cause an extra delay between jobs. Table 3-35 MP modes under the Optimize submenu ENWW LINE DETAIL Use this setting to improve line detail. RESTORE OPTIMIZE Use this setting to restore default settings. Use manual print modes 379 Solve image-quality problems Occasionally, you might encounter problems with print quality. The information in the following sections helps you identify and resolve these issues. Print-quality examples These examples identify the most common print-quality problems. If you still have problems after trying the suggested solutions, contact HP Customer Support. Table 3-36 Image defect examples Problem Image example Light print (partial page) Light print (entire page) Solution 1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed. 2. The toner level in the print cartridge might be low. Replace the print cartridge. 3. The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too rough). 1. Make sure that the print cartridge is fully installed. 2. Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the printer driver. 3. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Toner Density ● Select form a range of density settings. 4. Try using a different type of paper. 5. The print cartridge might be almost empty. Replace the print cartridge. 6. Clean the product paper path. 7. If the error persists, replace the transfer roller and clean the contacts. 8. If the error persists, replace the high-voltage power supply. 9. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 10. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner. 380 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Specks Solution Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared. Dropouts 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. 3. Try using a different type of paper. 4. Clean the cassette pickup roller. If the roller is dirty and can not be cleaned, replace the roller. 5. Check the print cartridge for leaks. If the print cartridge is leaking, replace it. 6. Clean the product paper path several times. 1. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 2. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Adjust Paper Types ● ◦ Print Mode ● Lines Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc ENWW Scroll to the desired paper type, and then press the OK button. Scroll to the print mode, and then press the OK button. 3. Try using a smoother paper that you know will work in the product. 4. Try using the Print/Stop Test in the Troubleshooting menu to determine if a image-formation component is malfunctioning. Replace the failed component. 5. If the error persists, replace the transfer roller. 6. The fuser pressure roller might not be within nip width specifications. If the error persists, replace fuser. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. 3. Replace the print cartridge. 4. Replace the print cartridge. Solve image-quality problems 381 Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Gray background Solution 1. Do not use paper that has already been run through the product. 2. Try using a different type of paper. 3. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 4. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 5. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Toner Density ● Select form a range of density settings. 6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 7. Clean the product paper path. 8. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner. 9. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 10. If the error persists, replace the high-voltage power supply. Toner smear Loose toner 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Try using a different type of paper. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 4. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. 5. Replace the print cartridge. Loose toner, in this context, is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page. 1. 382 Chapter 3 Solve problems Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ENWW Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution ◦ Adjust Paper Types ● ◦ Print Mode ● Repeat defects Repeat image Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk, The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn. Pkshkkhklhlkhkhyufwe4yrh9jjflkln djd skshkshdcnksnjcnal aksnclnslskjlncsl nas lnslna, ncnsljsjscljckn nsnclknsllj hwlsdknls nwljs nlnscl nijhsn clsncij hn. Iosi fsjs jlkh andjna this is a hn. jns fir stie a djakjd ajjssk. Thsi ius vnvlu tyeh lch afted, and when hghj hgjhk jdj a dt sonnleh. Suolklv jsdj hvjkrt ten sutc of jthjkfjkn vjdj hwjd, an olk d .at fhjdjht ajshef. Sewlfl nv atug ahgjfjknvr kdkjdh sj hvjk sjskrplo book. Camegajd sand their djnln as orged tyehha as as hf hv of the tinhgh in the cescmdal vlala tojk. Ho sn shj shjkh a sjca kvkjn? No ahdkj ahhtuah ahavjnv hv vh aefve r Tehreh ahkj vaknihidh was skjsaa a dhkjfn anj cjkhapsldnlj llhfoihrfhthej ahjkkjna oa h j a kah w asj kskjnk as sa fjkank cakajhjkn eanjsdn qa ejhc pjtpvjlnv4purlaxnwl. Ana l, and the askeina of ahthvnasm. Sayhvjan tjhhjhr ajn ve fh k v nja vkfkahjd a. Smakkljl a sehiah adheufh if you do klakc k w vka ah call lthe cjakha aa d a sd fijs. AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc ENWW Scroll to the print mode, and then press the OK button. 2. If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper, try printing on the smoother side. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 4. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser. 3. The print cartridge might need to be replaced. This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 3. The print cartridge might need to be replaced. 4. Clean the delivery roller. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 3. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 4. Try using another input tray. 5. If the error persists, reconnect the connectors (J143, J144, and J145) on the laser/scanner. 6. If the error persists, reconnect the connectors (J83 and J84) on the DC controller PCA. 7. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner. 8. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. Sincerely, Mr. Scmehnjcj Misformed characters Scroll to the desired paper type, and then press the OK button. Solve image-quality problems 383 Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Page skew Curl or wave Solution 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the product. 3. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made. Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the paper. 4. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 6. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 7. If the error persists, replace the registration assembly. 1. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 4. Try printing to a different output bin. 5. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Adjust Paper Types ● ◦ Print Mode ● 384 Chapter 3 Solve problems Scroll to the desired paper type, and then press the OK button. Scroll to the print mode, and then press the OK button. ENWW Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Wrinkles or creases Solution 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been made. 5. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 6. Try using another input tray. 7. If envelopes are creasing, try storing envelopes so that they lie flat. 8. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Adjust Paper Types ● ◦ Print Mode ● Vertical white lines Tire tracks Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc Aa BbCc ENWW Scroll to the desired paper type, and then press the OK button. Scroll to the print mode, and then press the OK button. 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 3. Replace the print cartridge. 4. If the error persist, the fuser sleeve might be scratched. Replace the fuser. 5. If the error persist, the mirror in the laser scanner might be contaminated. Replace the laser/scanner. This defect typically occurs when the print cartridge has far exceeded its rated life. For example, if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little toner coverage. 1. Replace the print cartridge. 2. Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage. Solve image-quality problems 385 Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example White spots on black Scattered lines Solution 1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself. 2. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 3. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 4. Clean the product paper path. 5. Replace the print cartridge. 1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Toner Density ● 5. Open the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the product control panel. On the PRINT QUALITY submenu, open OPTIMIZE and set LINE DETAIL=ON. ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Optimize ● 386 Chapter 3 Solve problems Select form a range of density settings. Select form a list of settings. 6. If the error persists, the transfer roller might be deformed or deteriorated. Replace the transfer roller. 7. If the error persists, replace the DC controller PCA. 8. If the error persists, replace the high-voltage power supply. ENWW Table 3-36 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Blurred print Image example Solution 1. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. 2. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. 3. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. 4. Do not use paper that already has been run through the product. 5. Open the following menus: ◦ Administration ◦ General Settings ◦ Print Quality ◦ Toner Density ● Random image repetition ENWW Select form a range of density settings. If an image that appears at the top of the page (in solid black) repeats further down the page (in a gray field), the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job. (The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in.) ● Print the job several times to determine if the problem persists. ● Change the tone (darkness) of the field that the repeated image appears in. ● Change the order in which the images are printed. For example, have the lighter image at the top of the page, and the darker image farther down the page. ● From your software program, rotate the whole page 180° to print the lighter image first. ● If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the product off for 10 minutes, and then turn it on to restart the print job. Solve image-quality problems 387 Clean the product Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems. Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the print cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the product free from dust and debris. To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth. Clean the paper path NOTE: If you are processing a cleaning page to clean the fuser, repeat the process 1 to 6 times until the paper comes out clean. Process a cleaning page 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Calibrate/Cleaning 3. Scroll to the Print Cleaning Page item, and then press the OK button. 4. The product prints a cleaning page, and then returns to the main menu. Discard the printed page. Set up an auto cleaning page Use the procedure in this section to set up an automatic cleaning page. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Device Maintenance ● Calibrate/Cleaning 3. Press the Down arrow to highlight the Auto Cleaning item, and then select the Enabled item. Press the OK button. 4. Scroll to the Cleaning Interval item, and then use the arrow buttons to select an interval. Press the OK button. TIP: HP recommends processing a cleaning page after every 5000 printed pages. 5. 388 Scroll to the Auto Cleaning Size item, and then use the arrow buttons to select the cleaning page size. Press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Solve performance problems Problem Cause Solution Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank pages. Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages. The product might be malfunctioning. To check the product, print a Configuration page. All of the print cartridges might be very low on toner. Replace the toner cartridges if a Supplies very low message is displayed. Heavier paper types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of paper. Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality. Complex pages can print slowly. Simplify the page. The product might not be pulling paper correctly. Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly. The paper is jamming in the product. Clear the jam. The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected. ● Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it. ● Try printing a job that has printed in the past. ● Try using a different USB cable. Pages print very slowly. Pages did not print. Other devices are running on your computer. ENWW The product might not share a USB port. If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer. Solve performance problems 389 Solve connectivity problems Solve direct-connect problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable. ● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product. ● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.5 ft). Replace the cable if necessary. ● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary. Solve network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page. See Internal print-quality test pages on page 241. Problem Solution Poor physical connection Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length. Verify that cable connections are secure. Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub. The computer is unable to communicate with the product. Use the command prompt to ping the product from your computer. For example: ping 192.168.45.39 Verify that the ping displays round-trip times, which indicates that it is working. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network. Incorrect link and duplex settings Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). See the user guide. Incorrect IP address for the product on the computer Use the correct IP address. The IP address is listed on the configuration page. New software programs have caused compatibility problems. Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer driver. Your computer or workstation is set up incorrectly. Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection. The protocol is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect. Review the configuration page to check the status of the protocol. Enable it if necessary. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary. See the user guide. 390 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Service mode functions Service menu The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to enter an eight-digit PIN number (Service Access Code). The PIN for the HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer is 10060111, 10060211, or 10060311 depending on your model. 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: 3. button. ● Device Maintenance ● Service ● Service Access Code Enter the eight-digit PIN using the arrow buttons or numeric keypad. After entering a digit, press the OK button. Repeat for each digit in the PIN. NOTE: Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. 4. Press the OK button to enter the PIN and open the Service menu. The following menu items appear in the Service menu: First level ENWW Second level Third level Description User Access Code Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. Administrator Access Code Only the Service Access Code can be used to access the Service menu. The message Your user account does not have permission to access the selected item displays if the correct Service Access Code is not used. Service Access Code This item allows access to the Service sub menus. Service mode functions 391 First level Second level Description Print Event Log Use this item to print the service event log. View Event Log Use this item to view the service event log. Clear Event Log Use this item to clear (erase) the service event log. Cycle Counts Test Support Third level Mono Cycle Counts Use this item to reset the mono print job page count. Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to reset the refurbuish print job page count. Serial Number Use this item to reset the product serial number. Service ID Use this item to reset the product service identification number. Cold Reset Paper Use this item to set the cold reset paper size. Continuous Print from USB Use this item to test print from an external USB. Product resets Restore factory-set defaults 1. Press the Home 2. Open the following menus: button. ● Administration ● General Settings ● Restore Factory Settings 3. Scroll to type of reset from a list, and then press the OK button. 4. Scroll to the Reset item, and then press the OK button. Restore factory-set defaults values ● 392 General ◦ Display and sound settings for the control panel ◦ Localization settings (for example, clock format and date format) Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW ● ● ◦ Error and warning log behavior ◦ Default media settings ◦ Sleep mode and delay setting ◦ Internal backup file maximum size ◦ Oxp installer solutions, tasks and pending tasks ◦ Http job defaults ◦ Clears the error, warning and info logs ◦ Supported media types ◦ Resets JetLink connected external devices Print ◦ Print default job, stored job and quick set settings ◦ Some print job usage data ◦ Print system configuration settings Security ◦ Default Authentication agent ◦ Authentication agents ◦ Policy agents Clean Disk and Partial Clean functions Active and repository firmware locations The firmware bundle now consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating System and the printer/peripheral firmware files. There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored: ● The Active – where the Operating System and firmware currently are executing ● The Repository – the recovery location If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers. If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Clean Disk was performed, then both locations are gone and the error message 99.09.67 appears on the control-panel display. The user must upload the firmware to the printer in order for it to function again ENWW Service mode functions 393 CAUTION: The Clean Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action. Partial Clean The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the product to a bootable state. Characteristics of a Partial Clean ● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted. ● Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings. ● For previous HP products, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function for this product. CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a Partial Clean if you need to retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu. Reasons for performing Partial Clean ● The product continually boots up in an error state. NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean. ● The product will not respond to commands from the control panel. ● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems. ● To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings. ● The product default settings are not properly working. Execute a Partial Clean 394 1. Turn the product on. 2. When the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid, press the Stop button. 3. Scroll to Administration, and then press the OK button. 4. Scroll to Partial Clean, and then press the OK button. Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 5. Press the OK button again. 6. Press the Back button to highlight Continue, and then press the OK button. NOTE: The product initializes. Clean Disk The Clean Disk option erases the entire disk drive. CAUTION: After executing a Clean Disk option, the product is not bootable. Characteristics of a Partial Clean ● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted. NOTE: Rebooting the product does not restore the firmware files. ● Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any customer-defined settings. ● After executing the Clean Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel. ● After executing the Clean Disk function, the product firmware must be reloaded. CAUTION: HP recommends that you do not use the Clean Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the product service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Clean Disk function, the product is unusable. HP recommends backing-up product configuration data before executing a Clean Disk if you need to retain customer-defined settings. See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu. Reasons for performing Clean Disk ● The product continually boots up in an error state. NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Clean Disk. ● The product will not respond to commands from the control panel. ● Executing the Clean Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems. ● To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings. Execute a Clean Disk ENWW 1. Turn the product on. 2. When the Ready, Data, and Attention LEDs are illuminated solid, press the Stop button. 3. Scroll to Administration, and then press the OK button. Service mode functions 395 4. Scroll to Clean Disk, and then press the OK button. 5. Press the OK button again. NOTE: When the Clean Disk operation is complete, you will need to reload the product firmware. 396 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW Product updates To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ lj600Series_firmware. Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware. See Internal print-quality test pages on page 241. On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision. Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples ● 20100831 (firmware datecode) ● 103067_104746 (firmware revision) Perform a firmware upgrade The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx.bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. You cannot upgrade the printer using the traditional FTP, LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading. Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product. Embedded Web Server 1. Open an browser window. 2. Enter the product IP address in the URL line. 3. Select the Firmware upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab. NOTE: If you get a warning screen, follow the instructions for setting an administrator password from the Security tab. 4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the firmware file. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade. NOTE: Do not close the browser window until the Embedded Web Server (EWS) displays the confirmation page. 5. ENWW Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page, or turn the product off, and then on again using the power button. Product updates 397 USB storage device (Preboot menu) 1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash memory storage device (thumb drive). 2. Turn the product on. 3. Press the Stop button when the Ready, Data and Attention LEDs illuminate solid. 4. Scroll to the Administrator menu, and then press the OK button. 5. Scroll to the Download item, and then press the OK button. 6. Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it. NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found appears on the control-panel display, you might need to connect the storage device to the external USB connection on the formatter or try using a different portable storage device. 7. Scroll to the USB Thumbdrive item, and then press the OK button. 8. Scroll to the xxxxxxx.bdl file, and then press the OK button. NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete. TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you select the correct file for this product. 9. When the message Complete appears on the control-panel display, press the Back button 3 times. 10. When the message Continue appears on the control-panel display, press the OK button. The product will initialize. 11. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed. See Print configuration page on page 243 and Determine the installed revision of firmware on page 397. 398 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW USB storage device (control-panel menu) 1. Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash memory storage device (thumbdrive). 2. Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state. 3. Press the Home 4. Scroll to the Device Maintenance item, and then press the OK button. 5. Scroll to the USB Firmware Upgrade item, and then press the OK button. 6. Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx.bdl file on it into the USB port on the front of the product, and then press the OK button. 7. Scroll to the xxxxxxx.bdl file item, and then press the OK button. button or OK button. TIP: If there is more than one xxxxxxx.bdl file on the storage device, make sure that you select the correct file for this product. 8. A prompt to upgrade an older, newer, or reinstall the same version appears. Press the down arrow button to highlight the desired option, and then press the OK button. When the upgrade is complete, the product will initialize. NOTE: The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete. 9. ENWW When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed. See Internal print-quality test pages on page 241 and Determine the installed revision of firmware on page 397. Product updates 399 400 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW 4 ENWW Parts and diagrams ● Order parts by authorized service providers ● How to use the parts lists and diagrams ● Assembly locations ● Covers ● Internal components ● Input devices ● Duplexer ● Envelope feeder ● Output devices ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 401 Order parts by authorized service providers Order parts, accessories, and supplies Table 4-1 Order parts, accessories, and supplies Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Order using HP software For information about using the HP software to order parts, accessories, and supplies, see the product user guide. Supplies part numbers Table 4-2 Supplies part numbers Item Description Part number HP LaserJet print cartridge with HP ColorSphere toner Black print cartridge (standard) CE390A (new) CE390-67901 (service) Black print cartridge (high capacity) CE390X (new) CE390-67902 (service) Customer-self repair parts Each kit includes parts and installation instructions. The customer-self repair (CSR) level indicates the expected difficulty the customer will experience when replacing this part: ● A = Manditory ● B = Optional ● C = Very difficult Item Part number CSR level Transfer roller kit CE988-60793 A CE988-67909 A ● Transfer roller assembly (with removal tool) ● Installation instructions Output bin assembly kit 402 ● Output bin ● Installation instructions Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Item Part number CSR level Formatter kit CE988-67906 A ● Formatter assembly ● Installation instructions Fuser kit ● Fuser assembly ● Installation instructions Tray 2-X pickup and feed rollers kit ● Paper pickup rollers ● Paper feed rollers ● Installation instructions Tray 1rollers kit ● Tray 1 pickup roller ● Tray 1 feed roller ● Tray 1 separation roller ● Installation instructions Solid state memory kit ● Solid state memory, 8 GB ● Installation instructions Hard disk drive encrypted kit ● Hard disk drive encrypted, 250 GB ● Installation instructions Preventative maintenance service kits ENWW ● Fuser ● Transfer roller (and tool) ● Tray 2-X pickup and feed rollers kit ● Disposable gloves ● Installation instructions CE988-67908 (China) CE988-67901 (110 V) A CE988-67902 (220 V) CE988-67904 A CE988-67905 B CE988-67907 B CE502-67915 B 110 volt: CF064-67901 A 220 volt: CF065-67901 1x500-sheet feeder kit CE998-67901 A Custom media cassette kit CB527-67901 A Staple cartridge kit Q3216-67901 A 512 MB memory kit CE483-67901 A Envelope feeder kit CE399-67901 A Order parts by authorized service providers 403 Item Part number CSR level Duplex kit CF062-67901 A 500-sheet stacker kit CE404-67901 A 500-sheet stapler/stacker kit CE405-67901 A 5-bin mailbox kit CE997-67901 A Product stand kit CF063-67901 A Accessories part numbers Table 4-3 Accessories part numbers Item Description Part number 1x500-sheet feeder Optional feeder to increase paper capacity. CE998A The product can accommodate up to four optional 500-sheet feeders 404 1x1500-sheet feeder Optional feeder to increase paper capacity. CE398A Custom media cassette Enables the product to print A6-size paper from Tray 2. CE527A 1,000-staple cartridge Staple cartridge refill Q3216A 44 X 32-PIN DDR2 memory DIMM, 512 mb Memory DIMM CE483A Envelope feeder Optional input accessory to increase paper handling. CE399A Duplexer (duplex printing accessory) Allows automatic printing on both sides of the paper. CF062A 500-sheet stacker Provides an additional output bin that holds 500 sheets. CE404A 500-sheet stapler/stacker Allows for high-volume output with automatic job finishing. Staples up to 15 sheets of paper. CE405A HP 5-bin mailbox Provides five output bins that you can use to sort jobs. CE997A Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-3 Accessories part numbers (continued) Item Description Part number Printer stand Provides stability when multiple optional trays are installed. The stand has casters so you can easily move the product. CF063A Power cords China 220V - 10A 8121-0951 Thailand 122V - 10A 8121-0952 Argentina 220V - 10A 8121-0953 Switzerland 220V - 10A 8121-0947 Denmark 220V - 10A 8121-0949 South Africa 220V - 10A 8121-0954 Malaysia, Hong Kong, Singapore 220V - 10A 8121-0946 Korea, Vietnam, Indonesia, Europe 220V - 10A 8121-0950 Peru, Chile 220V - 10A 8120-5301 Israel 220V - 10A 8121-1005 Australia 220V - 10A 8121-0872 China 220V - 10A 8121-0945 Taiwan 110V - 13A 8121-0971 Brazil 110V - 10A 8121-1070 India 220V - 6A 8121-1083 US, Saudia Arabia, Canada, Mexico 110V - 13A 8121-1142 Japan 110V - 12A 8121-1144 Related documentation and software Table 4-4 Related documentation and software ENWW Item Description Part number HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer User Guide Product user guide CE988-90901 HP LaserJet Enterprise M600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer Service Manual English service manual (this manual) CE988-90945 Order parts by authorized service providers 405 How to use the parts lists and diagrams The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU). CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column. Doing so will ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model. NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. 406 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Assembly locations Base product (no optional trays or accessories) Figure 4-1 Base product (no optional trays or accessories; 1 of 3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ENWW Item Description 1 Top output bin 2 Control panel (the M602 and M603 models include a numeric keypad) 3 Top cover (provides access to the print cartridge) 4 Walkup USB printing 5 Tray 1 (pull to open) 6 On/off button 7 Tray 2 Assembly locations 407 Figure 4-2 Base product (no optional trays or accessories; 2 of 3) 5 1 2 4 3 Item Description 1 Rear output bin 2 Duplex accessory cover (remove to install the duplex accessory) 3 Interface ports(formatter) 4 Right cover (provides access to the DIMM slot) 5 Hardware integration pocket (M602 and M603 models only) Figure 4-3 Base product (no optional trays or accessories; 3 of 3) 1 2 3 5 408 Item Description 1 RJ-45 Network connection 2 Power connection 3 Host USB connection Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 4 ENWW ENWW Item Description 4 Slot for a cable-type security lock 5 High-speed USB 2.0 connection Assembly locations 409 Covers Product base Figure 4-4 Covers 1 M602 & M603 *A02 11 *A03 12 *A01 M601 *A02 13 12 7 M601 2 14 5 9 6 17 4 15 16 3 10 410 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 8 *A03 ENWW Table 4-5 Covers ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, option RC2-2459-000CN 1 2 Cover, formatter RC2-2468-000CN 1 3 Cover, right front RC3-1426-000CN 1 4 Cover, envelope connector RC2-2476-000CN 1 5 Cover, duplexing assembly RM1-8399-000CN 1 6 Cover, legal RC2-5239-000CN 1 7 Face-up tray assembly RM1-8388-000CN 1 8 Cover, front assembly RM1-8408-000CN 1 9 Cover, right (M602 and M603) RM1-8400-000CN 1 9 Cover, right (M601) RM1-8445-000CN 1 10 Cover, left assembly RM1-8401-000CN 1 11 Cover, top assembly (M602 and M603) RM1-8394-000CN 1 11 Cover, top assembly (M601) RM1-8434-000CN 1 12 Control-panel assembly (M602 and M603) RM1-8289-000CN 1 12 Control-panel assembly (M601) RM1-8290-000CN 1 13 Cover, right rear RC2-2478-000CN 1 14 Cover, HIP (M602 and M603) RC3-1424-000CN 1 15 Button, power RC3-1430-000CN 1 16 Cap, power button RC3-1431-000CN 1 17 Cover, USB RC3-1434-000CN 1 Covers 411 Internal components Internal components (1 of 3) Figure 4-5 Internal components (1 of 3) 501 501 9 See registration assembly 7 15 502 2 See power supply *A07 11 (J87) 4 3 (M102) (J187) A 5 A 8 (J120) (SW102) (J99) *A02 16 17 *A03 501 10 6 *A05 18 (J1061) (J32) *A01 14 10 See paper-feed roller assembly 10 501 19 10 13 1 *A06 501 19 10 12 *A04 10 See Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup assembly 501 See cassette 412 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-6 Internal components (1 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cover, envelope feeder RL1-1667-000CN 1 2 Transfer roller RM1-8491-000CN 1 3 Arm, release A RC2-2480-000CN 1 4 Arm, release B RC2-2481-000CN 1 5 Motor, drum assembly (M102) RM1-8358-000CN 1 6 Size detect assembly RM1-4525-000CN 1 7 Cable, drum motor RM1-8308-000CN 1 8 Cable, size sensor RM1-5091-000CN 1 9 Plate, ground assembly RM1-5461-000CN 1 10 Screw, D, M3x8 XA9-1671-000CN 21 11 Screw, tap, M3x6 XA9-1503-000CN 3 12 Spring, torsion RC3-1470-000CN 1 13 Screw, M4x5 RC2-2633-000CN 2 14 PCA, switch assembly RM1-8428-000CN 1 15 Rod, release, upper RC2-2482-000CN 1 16 Drum drive assembly RM1-8489-000CN 1 17 Rod, release lower RC2-2483-000CN 1 18 Guard, edge RC1-0247-000CN 1 19 Spacer, frame RC2-2725-000CN 2 501 Screw, tapping pan head M4X10 XB4-7401-607CN 16 Internal components 413 Internal components (2 of 3) Figure 4-6 Internal components (2 of 3) *A02 *A02 *A02 *A03 14 *A02 (J93) (J86) *A04 (J145) *A24 *A07 *A18 *A17 1 *A16 (J91) *A28 *A02 *A14 *A29 *A23 *A05 *A09 *A20 *A32 *A12 *A02 *A33 *A02 *A25 *A14 *A27 *A13 7 (M101) *A19 *A02 17 18 *A05 (J191) (SL101) (J72) 16 2 (CL101) (J77) *A08 *A26 12 A 4 *A05 15 11 19 *A15 *A02 *A06 *A34 *A01 *A01 A (J74) *A21 8 *A02 *A22 *A02 *A02 20 (J92) *A02 5 6 414 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 10 (PS107) *A11 9 13 3 *A10 (PS907) 501 (PS101) *A30 *A31 ENWW Table 4-7 Internal components (2 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Laser/scanner assembly RM1-8406-000CN 1 2 Motor, paper feed assembly (M101) RM1-8285-000CN 1 3 Shaft retard drive RL1-3020-000CN 1 4 Solenoid RK2-4078-000CN 1 5 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 1 6 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 7 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-8415-000CN 1 8 Tag holder assembly RM1-4539-000CN 1 9 Paper feed shaft assembly RM1-8424-000CN 1 10 Cable, feed sensor RM1-8298-000CN 1 11 Ring, E XD9-0232-000CN 1 12 Cable, feed motor RM1-8311-000CN 1 13 Guide, front right assembly RM1-8427-000CN 1 14 Cable, laser RM1-8340-000CN 1 15 Bushing RC1-0214-000CN 1 16 Ring, E XD9-0233-010CN 1 17 Bushing RC3-1403-000CN 1 18 Gear, 18T RU5-0088-000CN 1 19 Gear, 23T RU5-0040-000CN 1 20 Spring, compression RC1-0213-000CN 1 501 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 XB4-7300-809CN 2 Internal components 415 Internal components (3 of 3) Figure 4-7 Internal components (3 of 3) (J106) *A21 (J106B) (J106A) (J90) 15 (J176) (J76) (J78) *A03 *A20 *A18 *A17 9 (FN104) (J2002) 24 (P1) (J79) *A22 *A28 21 (J100) *A14 *A27 *A26 *A06 *A11 7 BASE MODEL *A30 *A29 12 *A06 *A05 A (SW101) 25 (J31) (PS104) (J176) See paper delivery *A24 assembly *A06 8 *A12 17 22 (SW103) (J33) *A06 *A25 *A23 (J97) (P1) 23 20 *A06 *A06 *A19 *A06 *A32 (J88) See fuser (J105) *A07 28 *A32 *A15 *A06 *A31 10 *A05 *A32 11 1 (M299) (J89) (J221) *A16 5 *A06 *A13 13 *A10 501 A *A01 *A05 *A06 (FN102) (J75) (J2001) *A06 (J1052) 4 3 *A02 (FN101) (J64) 26 (FN103) (J66) (TH3) (J63) 6 *A06 *A09 (J118) *A05 (J83) *A04 *A08 (J170) Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 18 16 *A06 (M103) (J73) 14 2 (J70) 416 27 *A06 19 *A06 ENWW Table 4-8 Internal components (3 of 3) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Guide, right assembly RM1-4558-000CN 1 2 Cable, panel RM1-8341-000CN 1 3 Sensor, temperature assembly RM1-8438-000CN 1 4 Fan (FN101) RK2-1988-000CN 1 5 Fan (FN102) RK2-1989-000CN 1 6 Fan (FN103) RK2-3244-000CN 1 7 Fan (FN104) RK2-1992-000CN 1 8 Bushing, paper delivery RC1-0136-000CN 1 9 Paper delivery drive assembly RM1-8410-000CN 1 10 PCA, DC controller RM1-8293-000CN 1 11 Motor, fuser (M299) RM1-5051-020CN 1 12 Switch, interlock assembly RM1-8307-000CN 1 13 Cable, fuser motor RM1-5088-000CN 1 14 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4585-000CN 1 15 Cable, full sensor RM1-8927-000CN 1 16 Cable, envelope feeder RM1-5085-000CN 1 17 Photo interrupter, IC WG8-5849-000CN 1 20 PCA, inner connecting RM1-8294-000CN 1 21 Cable, flat flexible (FFC) RK2-4077-000CN 1 22 Switch, push WC2-5637-000CN 1 24 Cable, HIP (M602 and M603) RK2-4152-000CN 1 25 Cable, door switch RM1-8344-000CN 1 26 USB PCA RM1-8429-000CN 1 27 Cable, USB RK2-4149-000CN 1 28 Guide assembly, left RM1-8439-000CN 1 Internal components 417 High-voltage power supply Figure 4-8 High-voltage power supply *A10 (J1) 3 *A01 *A03 502 4 *A02 *A05 *A08 *A06 5 501 *A09 *A04 *A07 1 (J82) (J84) (J85) (J95) (J124DB) (J124DA) (J96) (J128) (J98) (J30) 2 418 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-9 High-voltage power supply ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper feed assembly RM1-4548-000CN 1 2 High-voltage power supply 110V RM1-8392-000CN 1 2 High-voltage power supply 220V RM1-8393-000CN 1 3 Connector, inlet RM1-8348-000CN 1 4 Connector, drawer 6P VS1-7514-006CN 1 Internal components 419 Cassette (Tray 2) Figure 4-9 Cassette (Tray 2) *A23 *A24 *A05 *A04 *A06 *A34 *A36 *A10 *A26 *A21 *A20 *A17 *A35 *A30 *A03 *A38 *A25 *A27 *A28 *A02 *A01 *A12 *A16 *A14 *A40 *A15 *A32 A *A13 *A22 *A31 *A11 *A09 *A39 *A29 *A08 *A07 *A33 *A18 3 A 2 1 *A37 *A19 420 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-10 Cassette (Tray 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cassette (Tray 2) RM1-4559-020CN 1 2 Torque limiter (Tray 2) RC2-5771-000CN 1 3 Roller, paper feed assembly (Tray 2) RM1-0037-020CN 1 Internal components 421 Cassette (custom media) Figure 4-10 Cassette (custom media) *A24 *A25 *A05 *A04 *A06 *A15 6 5 *A10 *A31 *A27 4 *A22 *A21 *A18 8 7 *A03 *A26 *A28 *A29 *A01 *A16 *A33 *A12 *A17 *A14 *A37 A *A13 *A07 *A32 *A23 *A08 *A34 *A11 *A19 *A09 *A35 *A02 *A36 *A30 2 A 1 3 *A20 422 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-11 Cassette (custom media) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Torque limiter (custom media) RM1-0037-000CN 1 2 Roller, paper feed assembly (custom media) RM1-4560-000CN 1 7 Pin, cassette (custom media) RC2-6486-000CN 1 8 Pin, stopper (custom media) RC2-6487-000CN 1 Internal components 423 Paper feed roller assembly Figure 4-11 Paper feed roller assembly *A14 *A04 *A09 *A05 *A11 *A10 *A13 *A01 *A13 *A12 *A02 *A03 *A08 *A06 *A07 1 *A13 *A01 *A12 424 *A02 *A08 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-12 Paper feed roller assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-8411-000CN 1 Internal components 425 Registration assembly Figure 4-12 Registration assembly *A15 A *A16 *A19 *A10 *A28 *A08 *A05 *A02 *A09 *A14 *A01 *A29 *A05 *A09 *A12 *A22 *A06 *A26 *A20 *A27 *A23 *A04 *A17 *A12 A *A13 *A21 *A27 *A25 *A24 *A11 *A07 *A22 *A18 *A26 1 *A03 *A27 426 *A21 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-13 Registration assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Registration assembly RM1-8413-0000CN 1 Internal components 427 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly Figure 4-13 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly *A07 *A20 *A31 *A12 *A32 *A01 *A38 *A24 *A08 *A38 *A23 *A38 *A41 *A25 (SL102) *A09 (J71) *A18 *A36 *A06 *A13 *A14 *A27 4 *A40 *A35 *A26 (J81) (J123) *A04 *A38 *A34 (PS105) *A03 *A28 *A38 *A30 *A42 *A38 *A29 *A02 *A17 *A21 *A19 *A16 2 *A39 3 *A25 *A05 *A37 1 *A11 *A15 *A22 *A33 *A10 428 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-14 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly RM1-8425-000CN 1 2 Roller pickup, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1641-000CN 1 3 Roller feed, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1663-000CN 1 4 Roller separation, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1654-020CN 1 Internal components 429 Paper delivery assembly Figure 4-14 Paper delivery assembly *A03 1 A *A01 *A02 *A14 2 *A15 *A04 *A05 *A16 *A17 *A12 *A13 *A10 *A19 A *A06 *A09 *A18 *A07 *A11 3 *A05 430 *A09 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams *A08 ENWW Table 4-15 Paper delivery assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper delivery assembly RM1-8414-000CN 1 2 Spring, tension RC1-0133-000CN 1 3 Spring, grounding RU6-2105-000CN 1 Internal components 431 Fuser assembly Figure 4-15 Fuser assembly *A04 *A34 *A52 *A28 *A11 *A40 *A46 *A10 (J136) 3 *A47 2 *A12 *A25 *A47 *A10 *A53 *A54 *A39 *A05 *A05 *A54 (J134) (J131) (J778) *A57 *A24 A *A56 *A38 *A06 *A42 (J778) *A50 (J929) (J129) *A23 (J128LB) *A45 (J128LA) *A16 *A31 *A03 *A37 *A37 *A15 *A08 *A02 (J929) (J129) (PS700) *A02 *A51 *A21 432 B A *A09 *A44 *A20 *A01 *A49 (J136) *A19 *A17 *A32 *A30 *A44 B *A26 *A55 *A18 *A48 *A14 *A27 *A50 *A35 *A29 (PS699) *A43 *A07 *A17 *A55 *A36 *A27 *A13 (J131) 1 (J128) *A49 *A41 (J134) *A33 *A22 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-16 Fuser assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fuser assembly 110V RM1-8395-000CN 1 1 Fuser assembly 220V RM1-8396-000CN 1 Internal components 433 PCAs (product base) Figure 4-16 PCAs (product base) 4 3 1 2 434 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-17 PCAs (product base) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA, DC controller RM1-8293-000CN 1 2 Power supply, high-voltage 110V RM1-8392-000CN 1 2 Power supply, low-voltage 220V RM1-8393-000CN 1 3 PCA, inner connecting RM1-8294-000CN 1 4 Formatter CE988-67906 1 Internal components 435 Input devices 1x500-sheet feeder Covers (1x500) Figure 4-17 Covers (1x500) *A02 1 2 4 5 3 7 *A01 6 436 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-18 Covers (1x500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Cover, lock (1x500) RC2-2584-000CN 1 5 Cover, legal (1x500) RC2-5239-000CN 1 7 Number dial assembly (1x500) RM1-4591-000CN 1 Input devices 437 Main body (1x500) Figure 4-18 Main body (1x500) 9 *A28 (J105LB) (J105LA) (J105L) 5 (J1602) *A28 E *A13 *A28 4 (J1606) (J1608) 7 (J1623) (J1603) (J1607) *A28 *A26 *A28 *A29 *A29 F *A29 11 *A08 *A28 10 *A28 A *A25 *A04 *A19 *A16 2 *A09 *A01 (J1605) 3 E 8 *A29*A22 B *A28 *A02 *A27 1 *A17 (SL1600) (J1604) *A23 *A10 A *A29 F *A31 *A18 C *A11 *A31 *A29 *A29 *A06 *A12 *A28 *A12 *A28 *A30 *A03 *A28 *A15 6 D *A20 *A24 *A14 *A07 B *A05 438 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams C D *A21 See Cassette (1x500) ENWW Table 4-19 Main body (1x500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Solenoid (1x500) RK2-0270-000CN 1 2 Size detect assembly (1x500) RM1-4525-000CN 1 3 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) RM1-0037-020CN 1 6 Plate, pickup drive side assembly (1x500) RM1-8441-000CN 1 8 PCA, Feeder (1x500) RM1-8302-000CN 1 9 Connector, drawer 6P (1x500) VS1-7500-006CN 1 10 Lifter drive assembly (1x500) RM1-1094-050CN 1 11 Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x500) RM1-0036-020CN 1 Input devices 439 Cassette (1x500) Figure 4-19 Cassette (1x500) *A23 *A24 *A05 *A04 *A06 *A34 *A36 *A10 *A26 *A21 *A20 *A17 *A35 *A30 *A03 *A38 *A25 *A27 *A28 *A02 *A01 *A12 *A16 *A14 *A40 *A15 *A32 A *A13 *A22 *A31 *A11 *A09 *A39 *A29 *A08 *A07 *A33 *A18 3 A 2 1 *A37 *A19 440 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-20 Cassette (1x500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Cassette (1x500) RM1-4559-020CN 1 2 Torque limiter (1x500) RC2-5771-000CN 1 3 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) RM1-0037-020CN 1 Input devices 441 PCA (1x500) Figure 4-20 PCA (1x500) 1 442 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-21 PCA (1x500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA, feeder (1x500) RM1-8302-000CN 1 Input devices 443 1x1500-sheet paper deck Covers (1x1500) Figure 4-21 Covers (1x1500) 6 1 2 See Main body (1x1500) *A04 6 5 *A04 *A02 *A03 7 7 4 6 444 3 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams *A01 6 See Front door assembly (1x1500) ENWW Table 4-22 Covers (1x1500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 5 Cover, lock (1x1500) RC2-2584-000CN 1 Input devices 445 Front door assembly (1x1500) Figure 4-22 Front door assembly (1x1500) 1 3 2 446 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-23 Front door assembly (1x1500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Front door assembly (1x1500) RM1-5255-020CN 1 2 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) RM1-0037-020CN 1 3 Torque limiter (1x1500) RC2-5771-000CN 1 Input devices 447 Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) Figure 4-23 Main body (1x500; 1of 2) (J105L) 12 (J105LB) 2 (J105LA) *A32 See Paper pickup assembly (1x1500) (J1701) *A40 *A01 11 *A40 B *A40 C A *A40 See PCA *A39 (1x1500) *A38 *A29 5 *A40 *A28 (J1706) *A08 *A26 *A31 13 *A42 *A23 *A35 7 *A41 *A31 13 *A40 *A18 *A40 *A39 *A40 (M1700) (J1703) *A42 1 *A37 *A40 (J1704) *A40 *A41 8 *A17 *A20 B *A40 *A19 *A40 448 *A02 *A17 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams A *A30 *A39 *A30 *A39 *A40 4 (J1722) *A03 *A40 *A06 *A07 ENWW Table 4-24 Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping (M1700) (1x1500) RH7-1603-020CN 1 5 Paper pickup drive assembly (1x1500) RM1-8457-000CN 1 7 Oil damper assembly (1x1500) RM1-0289-030CN 1 8 Lifter drive assembly (1x1500) RM1-8453-000CN 1 11 Numbering assembly (1x1500) RM1-5265-000CN 1 12 Connector, drawer 6 pin(1x1500) VS1-7500-006CN 1 Input devices 449 Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) Figure 4-24 Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) *A36 *A40 *A27 C *A40 *A21 *A27 *A40 *A11 *A12 *A15 *A12 *A15 *A15 *A12 *A11 *A11 *A12 *A11 *A12 *A11 *A15 *A40 9 *A40 450 *A40 *A12 *A14 *A40 *A11 *A34 *A25 *A33 *A34 *A04 *A40 *A40 3 (J1724) *A11 *A12 D *A15 *A40 10 *A40 *A15 *A40 (J1702) *A40 *A14 *A12 *A11 *A22 *A16 *A33 *A09 *A10 *A34 *A24 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams *A05 *A40 D *A16 *A10 *A09 *A33 *A13 ENWW Table 4-25 Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 9 Remnant indication assembly (1x1500) RM1-5259-000CN 1 10 Paper size detect assembly (1x1500) RM1-5261-000CN 1 Input devices 451 Paper pickup assembly (1x500) Figure 4-25 Paper pickup assembly (1x500) *A22 *A20 *A25 A *A21 *A26 *A23 *A20 B B *A29 *A24 *A22 A 5 *A28 *A11 *A14 *A31 (J1705) *A30 (J1723) (PS1704) (J1723) *A27 *A19 *A28 *A14 *A10 *A10 *A15 *A17 3 *A16 (J1707) *A08 *A06 *A10 2 *A07 *A01 *A05 *A10 *A10 *A18 *A03 *A09 *A10 4 *A02 *A04 *A12 *A13 452 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 1 ENWW Table 4-26 Paper pickup assembly (1x500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) RM1-0037-020CN 1 2 Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x1500) RM1-0036-020CN 1 3 Paper detect sensor assembly (1x1500) RM1-8456-000CN 1 4 Flag, paper detect (1x1500) RC2-2524-000CN 1 Input devices 453 PCA (1x1500) Figure 4-26 PCA (1x1500) 1 454 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-27 PCA (1x1500) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA, feeder (1x1500) RM1-8303-000CN 1 Input devices 455 Duplexer Main body (duplexer) Figure 4-27 Main body (duplexer) *A49 5 *A18 *A09 3 7 *A49 4 6 A 1 17 2 (J1501) (J124L) (FM1501) *A05 *A03 (J1523) *A06 (J1504) *A52 *A02 See PCA (duplexer) D (PS1501) (J1523) *A23 *A42 *A51 (J1522) (PS1503) *A43 (J1503) 16 (J1506) *A28 C D *A37 *A35 *A36 A *A53 F *A16 *A01 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams B *A32 *A53 *A21 *A19 *A24 8 *A50 *A45 *A15 *A53 *A15 *A20 *A25 *A10 *A51 *A04 *A15 *A22 *A11 *A53 *A38 *A39 *A33 (J1520) E *A15 *A40 *A34 *A27 15 (M1501) *A01 (J1520) (J1521) (M1502) (J1521) *A12 *A44 456 *A26 *A53 14 *A41 *A50 *A07 *A30 *A29 11 10 11 (J1524) (J1505) *A51 *A51 B (PS1502) (J1524) 11 9 *A08 E *A47 *A46 *A47 C 13 (J1502) *A31 *A13 *A17 F *A14 *A31 *A48 ENWW Table 4-28 Main body (duplexer) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 8 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1501) (duplexer) RK2-2015-000CN 1 9 Fan (FN1501) (duplexer) RK2-2016-000CN 1 10 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1502) (duplexer) RK2-2139-000CN 1 11 Photo interrupter (duplexer) WG8-5849-000CN 3 16 Cable, paper re-pickup motor (duplexer) RM1-5141-000CN 1 Duplexer 457 PCA (duplexer) Figure 4-28 PCA (duplexer) 1 458 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-29 PCA (duplexer) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA (duplexer) RM1-8305-000CN 1 Duplexer 459 Envelope feeder Covers (envelope feeder) Figure 4-29 Covers (envelope feeder) 6 1 (J1856) (J1855) (J1854) (J1804) 4 5 7 *A03 *A04 *A02 *A05 *A02 3 *A06 *A06 2 *A01 460 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-30 Covers (envelope feeder) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Tray, extension (envelope feeder) RC2-5705-000CN 1 6 Weight assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5226-000CN 1 Envelope feeder 461 Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) Figure 4-30 Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) *A15 *A06 (PS1802) *A14 (J1850) (J1800) *A13 *A16 *A07 1 3 *A05 *A19 *A11 *A08 *A17 *A01 *A18 *A10 *A18 *A08 *A12 *A18 *A10 *A08 4 *A02 *A18 C *A02 *A18 B *A09 A *A02 *A18 2 *A03 7 *A04 6 C 462 B Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 5 A *A18 ENWW Table 4-31 Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Photo interrupter (envelope feeder) WG8-5624-000CN 1 2 Roller, separation assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5224-000CN 1 4 Roller, paper feed assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5223-000CN 1 5 Roller, paper pickup assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5221-000CN 1 6 Roller, paper pickup (envelope feeder) RC2-5700-000CN 1 7 Roller, paper feed (envelope feeder) RC2-5701-000CN 1 Envelope feeder 463 Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) Figure 4-31 Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) *A16 See PCA (envelope feeder) *A14 *A03 *A04 3 *A04 *A05 *A05 *A06 *A07 *A09 *A08 *A10 *A11 *A12 *A10 *A11 4 (J1802) (J1852) 1 (M1800) *A15 *A01 *A02 *A13 464 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-32 Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1800) (envelope feeder) RK2-2162-000CN 1 Envelope feeder 465 PCA (envelope feeder) Figure 4-32 PCA (envelope feeder) 1 466 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-33 PCA (envelope feeder) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA (envelope feeder) RM1-9030-000CN 1 Envelope feeder 467 Output devices Stapler/stacker multi-bin mailbox (MBM) Covers (MBM) Figure 4-33 Covers (MBM) 4 2 3 5 9 *A01 *A02 (J1308) 11 (SL1301) 8 *A01 (J1301) 1 *A01 6 (J300LA) (J1300LB) (J300L) 7 468 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams 10 *A01 ENWW Table 4-34 Covers (MBM) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 10 Connector 8P (MBM) VS1-7500-008CN 1 11 Solenoid assembly, IN (MBM) RM1-5270-000CN 1 Output devices 469 Main body (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) Figure 4-34 Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) 2 3 *A29 A B 4 C *A07 *A31 3 D A *A16 *A16 *A25 B C *A12 *A10 *A25 D *A31 *A33 *A16 *A28*A27 *A14 *A25 *A24 *A16 *A14 *A25 *A15 *A16 *A25 12 *A30 *A31 1 *A32 5 13 (SL1302) (SL1303) (SL1304) (SL1305) (J1321L) (J1322L) (J1323L) (J1324L) (J1321D) (J1322D) (J1323D) *A02 9 (J1324D) (J1307) 470 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-35 Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Flag, paper sensing (MBM) RM1-5269-000CN 1 2 Top bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4665-000CN 1 3 Bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4666-000CN 2 4 Center bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4667-000CN 1 12 Bin assembly (MBM) RM1-6672-000CN 1 13 Solenoid (MBM) RL1-1709-000CN 1 Output devices 471 Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) Figure 4-35 Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) *A06 *A34 *A03 *A04 *A11 *A01 *A05 *A31 *A13 (J1326) *A35 *A17 *A26 10 *A08 *A18 (J1305) 11 7 *A17 *A22 *A21 *A09 *A35 *A17 *A37 *A23 *A20 *A17 *A18 *A19 *A09 *A36 *A36 *A37 *A31 (M1301) See PCA (MBM) 6 (J1306) *A31 *A31 472 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-36 Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Drive assembly (MBM) RM1-5267-000CN 1 7 Sensor assembly (MBM) RM1-5096-000CN 1 Output devices 473 PCA (MBM) Figure 4-36 PCA (MBM) 1 474 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-37 PCA (MBM) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA (MBM) RM1-8350-000CN 1 Output devices 475 Stacker and Stapler/Stacker (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) Figure 4-37 Covers (S and S/S) Stacker Stapler/Stacker 1 1 *A05 *A04 Stapler/Stacker Stacker 2 2 7 8 5 *A06 *A03 *A05 (J1109) *A01 13 (SL1101) 10 *A06 *A02 3 12 (J1101) (J106LA) (J106LB) 11 (J106L) *A06 4 9 6 476 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-38 Covers (S and S/S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Tray assembly (S and S/S) RM1-4671-000CN 1 9 Joint, left (S and S/S) RL1-1703-000CN 1 10 Joint, right (S and S/S) RL1-1704-000CN 1 11 Connector 8P (S and S/S) VS1-7500-008CN 1 13 Solenoid assembly, IN (S and S/S) RM1-5270-000CN 1 Output devices 477 Main body (SS) Figure 4-38 Main body (SS) 12 11 (J1108) 4 (J1125L) *A05 6 *A06 (J1123L) (J1124L) (J1112) B B (J1125D) 9 *A09 *A07 *A02 *A08 *A03 *A01 (J1111) 5 *A01 *A05 (J1123D) (J1124D) 10 A A (J1110) (M1101) (J1114) See Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (SS) 7 (SL1102) (J1129) (M1103) (J1105) (J1120) (J1121) (J1113) (J1102) 3 See PCA (S and S/S) 8 *A04 *A05 1 *A06 *A05 478 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-39 Main body (SS) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S/S) RK2-2025-000CN 1 4 Sensor, paper full assembly (S/S) RM1-1166-000CN 1 6 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1101) (S/S) RK2-2027-000CN 1 7 Solenoid (S/S) RL1-0506-000CN 1 10 Jog assembly (S/S) RM1-4670-000CN 1 12 Stapler assembly (S/S) RM1-4826-000CN 1 Output devices 479 Main body (S) Figure 4-39 Main body (S) *A05 *A02 *A03 4 (J1108) *A05 5 *A01 See Stacker middle assembly (S) *A01 (J1102) (J1129) 3 (J1105) (M1103) See PCA (S and S/S) *A05 1 *A04 *A06 *A05 480 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-40 Main body (S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S) RK2-2025-000CN 1 5 Stapler mount assembly (S) RM1-4676-000CN 1 Output devices 481 Middle assemblies (S and S/S) Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) Figure 4-40 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) *A31 *A41 *A39 *A05 2 *A52 *A16 *A16 *A07 *A13 (J1123DH) *A01 (J1124DH) *A43 *A29 *A36 *A29 *A18 *A43 *A16 *A16 *A23 *A35 4 *A37 *A43 *A16 *A03 *A26 *A16 *A21 1 *A02 *A12 *A16 *A16 *A28 *A27 *A06 *A08 482 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-41 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Flag, paper sensing (S/S) RM1-0239-000CN 1 Output devices 483 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) Figure 4-41 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) *A04 *A40 *A48 *A44 3 *A30 *A11 *A50 *A38 *A42 *A51 *A30 *A47 5 (PS1103) (J1120) *A49 5 *A37 *A11 *A46 *A40 *A45 *A22 *A42 *A34 (PS1104) (J1121) *A19 *A17 *A20 *A42 *A42 *A25 *A15 *A10 *A40 *A33 *A32 *A09 *A42 *A14 *A24 484 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-42 Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Roller, paper feed assembly (S/S) RM1-0253-020CN 1 5 Photo interrupter (S/S) WG8-5645-000CN 2 Output devices 485 Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) Figure 4-42 Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) *A31 *A41 *A39 *A05 2 *A01 *A16 *A16 *A07 *A13 *A36 *A29 *A29 *A18 *A36 *A16 *A16 *A23 *A35 4 *A37 *A36 *A16 *A03 *A26 *A16 *A21 1 *A02 *A12 *A16 *A16 *A28 *A27 *A06 *A08 486 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-43 Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Flag, paper sensing assembly (S) RM1-0239-000CN 1 4 LED PCA (S) RG1-4266-030CN 1 Output devices 487 Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) Figure 4-43 Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) *A04 3 *A30 *A11 *A38 *A42 *A30 *A37 *A11 *A22 *A42 *A34 *A19 *A17 *A20 *A42 *A42 *A25 *A15 *A09 *A40 *A10 *A33 *A32 *A42 *A14 *A24 488 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-44 Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 3 Roller, paper feed assembly (S) RM1-0253-020CN 1 Output devices 489 PCA (S and S/S) Figure 4-44 PCA (S and S/S) 1 490 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-45 PCA (S and S/S) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 PCA (S/S) RM1-8351-000CN 1 1 PCA (S) RM1-8352-000CN 1 Output devices 491 Alphabetical parts list Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list 492 Description Part number Table and page Arm, release A RC2-2480-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Arm, release B RC2-2481-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Bin assembly (MBM) RM1-6672-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4666-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Bushing RC1-0214-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Bushing RC3-1403-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Bushing, paper delivery RC1-0136-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Button, power RC3-1430-000CN Covers on page 411 Cable, door switch RM1-8344-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, drum motor RM1-8308-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Cable, envelope feeder RM1-5085-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, feed motor RM1-8311-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Cable, feed sensor RM1-8298-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Cable, flat flexible (FFC) RK2-4077-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, full sensor RM1-8927-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, fuser motor RM1-5088-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, HIP (M602 and M603) RK2-4152-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cable, laser RM1-8340-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Cable, panel RM1-8341-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Cable, paper re-pickup motor (duplexer) RM1-5141-000CN Main body (duplexer) on page 457 Cable, size sensor RM1-5091-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Cable, USB RK2-4149-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Cap, power button RC3-1431-000CN Covers on page 411 Cassette (1x500) RM1-4559-020CN Cassette (1x500) on page 441 Cassette (Tray 2) RM1-4559-020CN Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 Center bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4667-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Connector 8P (MBM) VS1-7500-008CN Covers (MBM) on page 469 Connector 8P (S and S/S) VS1-7500-008CN Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 Connector, drawer 6 pin(1x1500) VS1-7500-006CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Connector, drawer 6P VS1-7514-006CN High-voltage power supply on page 419 Connector, drawer 6P (1x500) VS1-7500-006CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Connector, inlet RM1-8348-000CN High-voltage power supply on page 419 Control-panel assembly (M601) RM1-8290-000CN Covers on page 411 Control-panel assembly (M602 and M603) RM1-8289-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, duplexing assembly RM1-8399-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, envelope connector RC2-2476-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, envelope feeder RL1-1667-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Cover, formatter RC2-2468-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, front assembly RM1-8408-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, HIP (M602 and M603) RC3-1424-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, left assembly RM1-8401-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, legal RC2-5239-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, legal (1x500) RC2-5239-000CN Covers (1x500) on page 437 Cover, lock (1x1500) RC2-2584-000CN Covers (1x1500) on page 445 Cover, lock (1x500) RC2-2584-000CN Covers (1x500) on page 437 Alphabetical parts list 493 Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) 494 Description Part number Table and page Cover, option RC2-2459-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, right (M601) RM1-8445-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, right (M602 and M603) RM1-8400-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, right front RC3-1426-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, right rear RC2-2478-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, top assembly (M601) RM1-8434-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, top assembly (M602 and M603) RM1-8394-000CN Covers on page 411 Cover, USB RC3-1434-000CN Covers on page 411 Drive assembly (MBM) RM1-5267-000CN Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) on page 473 Drum drive assembly RM1-8489-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Face-up tray assembly RM1-8388-000CN Covers on page 411 Fan (FN101) RK2-1988-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Fan (FN102) RK2-1989-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Fan (FN103) RK2-3244-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Fan (FN104) RK2-1992-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Fan (FN1501) (duplexer) RK2-2016-000CN Main body (duplexer) on page 457 Flag, paper detect (1x1500) RC2-2524-000CN Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 Flag, paper sensing (MBM) RM1-5269-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Flag, paper sensing (S/S) RM1-0239-000CN Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) on page 483 Flag, paper sensing assembly (S) RM1-0239-000CN Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) on page 487 Formatter CE988-67906 PCAs (product base) on page 435 Front door assembly (1x1500) RM1-5255-020CN Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 Fuser assembly 110V RM1-8395-000CN Fuser assembly on page 433 Fuser assembly 220V RM1-8396-000CN Fuser assembly on page 433 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Gear, 18T RU5-0088-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Gear, 23T RU5-0040-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Guard, edge RC1-0247-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Guide assembly, left RM1-8439-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Guide, front right assembly RM1-8427-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Guide, right assembly RM1-4558-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 High-voltage power supply 110V RM1-8392-000CN High-voltage power supply on page 419 High-voltage power supply 220V RM1-8393-000CN High-voltage power supply on page 419 Jog assembly (S/S) RM1-4670-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Joint, left (S and S/S) RL1-1703-000CN Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 Joint, right (S and S/S) RL1-1704-000CN Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 Laser/scanner assembly RM1-8406-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 LED PCA (S) RG1-4266-030CN Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) on page 487 Lifter drive assembly RM1-4585-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Lifter drive assembly (1x1500) RM1-8453-000CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Lifter drive assembly (1x500) RM1-1094-050CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Motor, drum assembly (M102) RM1-8358-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Motor, fuser (M299) RM1-5051-020CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Motor, paper feed assembly (M101) RM1-8285-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Motor, stepping (M1700) (1x1500) RH7-1603-020CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1101) (S/S) RK2-2027-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Alphabetical parts list 495 Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) 496 Description Part number Table and page Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S) RK2-2025-000CN Main body (S) on page 481 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S/S) RK2-2025-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1501) (duplexer) RK2-2015-000CN Main body (duplexer) on page 457 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1502) (duplexer) RK2-2139-000CN Main body (duplexer) on page 457 Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1800) (envelope feeder) RK2-2162-000CN Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 465 Number dial assembly (1x500) RM1-4591-000CN Covers (1x500) on page 437 Numbering assembly (1x1500) RM1-5265-000CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Oil damper assembly (1x1500) RM1-0289-030CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Paper delivery assembly RM1-8414-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 431 Paper delivery drive assembly RM1-8410-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Paper detect sensor assembly (1x1500) RM1-8456-000CN Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 Paper feed assembly RM1-4548-000CN High-voltage power supply on page 419 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-8411-000CN Paper feed roller assembly on page 425 Paper feed shaft assembly RM1-8424-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-8415-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Paper pickup drive assembly (1x1500) RM1-8457-000CN Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Paper size detect assembly (1x1500) RM1-5261-000CN Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) on page 451 PCA (duplexer) RM1-8305-000CN PCA (duplexer) on page 459 PCA (envelope feeder) RM1-9030-000CN PCA (envelope feeder) on page 467 PCA (MBM) RM1-8350-000CN PCA (MBM) on page 475 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page PCA (S) RM1-8352-000CN PCA (S and S/S) on page 491 PCA (S/S) RM1-8351-000CN PCA (S and S/S) on page 491 PCA, DC controller RM1-8293-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 PCA, DC controller RM1-8293-000CN PCAs (product base) on page 435 PCA, feeder (1x1500) RM1-8303-000CN PCA (1x1500) on page 455 PCA, Feeder (1x500) RM1-8302-000CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 PCA, feeder (1x500) RM1-8302-000CN PCA (1x500) on page 443 PCA, inner connecting RM1-8294-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 PCA, inner connecting RM1-8294-000CN PCAs (product base) on page 435 PCA, switch assembly RM1-8428-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Photo interrupter (duplexer) WG8-5849-000CN Main body (duplexer) on page 457 Photo interrupter (envelope feeder) WG8-5624-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Photo interrupter (S/S) WG8-5645-000CN Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) on page 485 Photo interrupter, IC WG8-5849-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Pin, cassette (custom media) RC2-6486-000CN Cassette (custom media) on page 423 Pin, stopper (custom media) RC2-6487-000CN Cassette (custom media) on page 423 Plate, ground assembly RM1-5461-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Plate, pickup drive side assembly (1x500) RM1-8441-000CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Power supply, high-voltage 110V RM1-8392-000CN PCAs (product base) on page 435 Power supply, low-voltage 220V RM1-8393-000CN PCAs (product base) on page 435 Registration assembly RM1-8413-0000CN Registration assembly on page 427 Alphabetical parts list 497 Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) 498 Description Part number Table and page Remnant indication assembly (1x1500) RM1-5259-000CN Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) on page 451 Ring, E XD9-0232-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Ring, E XD9-0233-010CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Rod, release lower RC2-2483-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Rod, release, upper RC2-2482-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Roller feed, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1663-000CN Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 Roller pickup, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1641-000CN Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 Roller separation, Tray 1 (MP) RL1-1654-020CN Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 Roller, paper feed (envelope feeder) RC2-5701-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) RM1-0037-020CN Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) RM1-0037-020CN Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) RM1-0037-020CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) RM1-0037-020CN Cassette (1x500) on page 441 Roller, paper feed assembly (custom media) RM1-4560-000CN Cassette (custom media) on page 423 Roller, paper feed assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5223-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Roller, paper feed assembly (S) RM1-0253-020CN Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) on page 489 Roller, paper feed assembly (S/S) RM1-0253-020CN Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) on page 485 Roller, paper feed assembly (Tray 2) RM1-0037-020CN Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 Roller, paper pickup (envelope feeder) RC2-5700-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x1500) RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x500) RM1-0036-020CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Roller, paper pickup assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5221-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Roller, separation assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5224-000CN Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Screw, D, M3x8 XA9-1671-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Screw, M4x5 RC2-2633-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 XB4-7300-809CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Screw, tap, M3x6 XA9-1503-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Screw, tapping pan head M4X10 XB4-7401-607CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Sensor assembly (MBM) RM1-5096-000CN Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) on page 473 Sensor, paper full assembly (S/S) RM1-1166-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Sensor, temperature assembly RM1-8438-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Shaft retard drive RL1-3020-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Size detect assembly RM1-4525-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Size detect assembly (1x500) RM1-4525-000CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Solenoid RK2-4078-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Solenoid (1x500) RK2-0270-000CN Main body (1x500) on page 439 Solenoid (MBM) RL1-1709-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Solenoid (S/S) RL1-0506-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Solenoid assembly, IN (MBM) RM1-5270-000CN Covers (MBM) on page 469 Solenoid assembly, IN (S and S/S) RM1-5270-000CN Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 Spacer, frame RC2-2725-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Alphabetical parts list 499 Table 4-46 Alphabetical parts list (continued) 500 Description Part number Table and page Spring, compression RC1-0213-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Spring, grounding RU6-2105-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 431 Spring, tension RC1-0133-000CN Paper delivery assembly on page 431 Spring, torsion RC3-1470-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Stapler assembly (S/S) RM1-4826-000CN Main body (SS) on page 479 Stapler mount assembly (S) RM1-4676-000CN Main body (S) on page 481 Switch, interlock assembly RM1-8307-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Switch, push WC2-5637-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Tag holder assembly RM1-4539-000CN Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Top bin flapper assembly (MBM) RM1-4665-000CN Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 Torque limiter (1x1500) RC2-5771-000CN Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 Torque limiter (1x500) RC2-5771-000CN Cassette (1x500) on page 441 Torque limiter (custom media) RM1-0037-000CN Cassette (custom media) on page 423 Torque limiter (Tray 2) RC2-5771-000CN Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 Transfer roller RM1-8491-000CN Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly RM1-8425-000CN Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 Tray assembly (S and S/S) RM1-4671-000CN Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 Tray, extension (envelope feeder) RC2-5705-000CN Covers (envelope feeder) on page 461 USB PCA RM1-8429-000CN Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Weight assembly (envelope feeder) RM1-5226-000CN Covers (envelope feeder) on page 461 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Numerical parts list Table 4-47 Numerical parts list ENWW Part number Description Table and page CE988-67906 Formatter PCAs (product base) on page 435 RC1-0133-000CN Spring, tension Paper delivery assembly on page 431 RC1-0136-000CN Bushing, paper delivery Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RC1-0213-000CN Spring, compression Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RC1-0214-000CN Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RC1-0247-000CN Guard, edge Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2459-000CN Cover, option Covers on page 411 RC2-2468-000CN Cover, formatter Covers on page 411 RC2-2476-000CN Cover, envelope connector Covers on page 411 RC2-2478-000CN Cover, right rear Covers on page 411 RC2-2480-000CN Arm, release A Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2481-000CN Arm, release B Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2482-000CN Rod, release, upper Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2483-000CN Rod, release lower Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2524-000CN Flag, paper detect (1x1500) Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 RC2-2584-000CN Cover, lock (1x500) Covers (1x500) on page 437 RC2-2584-000CN Cover, lock (1x1500) Covers (1x1500) on page 445 RC2-2633-000CN Screw, M4x5 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-2725-000CN Spacer, frame Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RC2-5239-000CN Cover, legal Covers on page 411 RC2-5239-000CN Cover, legal (1x500) Covers (1x500) on page 437 RC2-5700-000CN Roller, paper pickup (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 Numerical parts list 501 Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) 502 Part number Description Table and page RC2-5701-000CN Roller, paper feed (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 RC2-5705-000CN Tray, extension (envelope feeder) Covers (envelope feeder) on page 461 RC2-5771-000CN Torque limiter (Tray 2) Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 RC2-5771-000CN Torque limiter (1x500) Cassette (1x500) on page 441 RC2-5771-000CN Torque limiter (1x1500) Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 RC2-6486-000CN Pin, cassette (custom media) Cassette (custom media) on page 423 RC2-6487-000CN Pin, stopper (custom media) Cassette (custom media) on page 423 RC3-1403-000CN Bushing Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RC3-1424-000CN Cover, HIP (M602 and M603) Covers on page 411 RC3-1426-000CN Cover, right front Covers on page 411 RC3-1430-000CN Button, power Covers on page 411 RC3-1431-000CN Cap, power button Covers on page 411 RC3-1434-000CN Cover, USB Covers on page 411 RC3-1470-000CN Spring, torsion Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RG1-4266-030CN LED PCA (S) Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) on page 487 RH7-1603-020CN Motor, stepping (M1700) (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 RK2-0270-000CN Solenoid (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RK2-1988-000CN Fan (FN101) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-1989-000CN Fan (FN102) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-1992-000CN Fan (FN104) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-2015-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1501) (duplexer) Main body (duplexer) on page 457 RK2-2016-000CN Fan (FN1501) (duplexer) Main body (duplexer) on page 457 RK2-2025-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RK2-2025-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1103) (S) Main body (S) on page 481 RK2-2027-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1101) (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 RK2-2139-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1502) (duplexer) Main body (duplexer) on page 457 RK2-2162-000CN Motor, stepping, DC 24V (M1800) (envelope feeder) Main body (2 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 465 RK2-3244-000CN Fan (FN103) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-4077-000CN Cable, flat flexible (FFC) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-4078-000CN Solenoid Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RK2-4149-000CN Cable, USB Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RK2-4152-000CN Cable, HIP (M602 and M603) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RL1-0506-000CN Solenoid (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 RL1-1641-000CN Roller pickup, Tray 1 (MP) Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 RL1-1654-020CN Roller separation, Tray 1 (MP) Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 RL1-1663-000CN Roller feed, Tray 1 (MP) Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 RL1-1667-000CN Cover, envelope feeder Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RL1-1703-000CN Joint, left (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 RL1-1704-000CN Joint, right (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 RL1-1709-000CN Solenoid (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RL1-3020-000CN Shaft retard drive Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-0036-020CN Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-0036-020CN Roller, paper pickup assembly (1x1500) Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 Numerical parts list 503 Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) 504 Part number Description Table and page RM1-0037-000CN Torque limiter (custom media) Cassette (custom media) on page 423 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-0037-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (Tray 2) Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 RM1-0037-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-0037-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (1x500) Cassette (1x500) on page 441 RM1-0037-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 RM1-0037-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (1x1500) Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 RM1-0239-000CN Flag, paper sensing (S/S) Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S/S) on page 483 RM1-0239-000CN Flag, paper sensing assembly (S) Stacker middle assembly (1 of 2; S) on page 487 RM1-0253-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (S/S) Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) on page 485 RM1-0253-020CN Roller, paper feed assembly (S) Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S) on page 489 RM1-0289-030CN Oil damper assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 RM1-1094-050CN Lifter drive assembly (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-1166-000CN Sensor, paper full assembly (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 RM1-4525-000CN Size detect assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-4525-000CN Size detect assembly (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-4539-000CN Tag holder assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-4548-000CN Paper feed assembly High-voltage power supply on page 419 RM1-4558-000CN Guide, right assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-4559-020CN Cassette (Tray 2) Cassette (Tray 2) on page 421 RM1-4559-020CN Cassette (1x500) Cassette (1x500) on page 441 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-4560-000CN Roller, paper feed assembly (custom media) Cassette (custom media) on page 423 RM1-4585-000CN Lifter drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-4591-000CN Number dial assembly (1x500) Covers (1x500) on page 437 RM1-4665-000CN Top bin flapper assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RM1-4666-000CN Bin flapper assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RM1-4667-000CN Center bin flapper assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RM1-4670-000CN Jog assembly (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 RM1-4671-000CN Tray assembly (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 RM1-4676-000CN Stapler mount assembly (S) Main body (S) on page 481 RM1-4826-000CN Stapler assembly (S/S) Main body (SS) on page 479 RM1-5051-020CN Motor, fuser (M299) Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-5085-000CN Cable, envelope feeder Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-5088-000CN Cable, fuser motor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-5091-000CN Cable, size sensor Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-5096-000CN Sensor assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) on page 473 RM1-5141-000CN Cable, paper re-pickup motor (duplexer) Main body (duplexer) on page 457 RM1-5221-000CN Roller, paper pickup assembly (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 RM1-5223-000CN Roller, paper feed assembly (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 RM1-5224-000CN Roller, separation assembly (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 RM1-5226-000CN Weight assembly (envelope feeder) Covers (envelope feeder) on page 461 RM1-5255-020CN Front door assembly (1x1500) Front door assembly (1x1500) on page 447 Numerical parts list 505 Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) 506 Part number Description Table and page RM1-5259-000CN Remnant indication assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) on page 451 RM1-5261-000CN Paper size detect assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 2 of 2) on page 451 RM1-5265-000CN Numbering assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 RM1-5267-000CN Drive assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 2 of 2) on page 473 RM1-5269-000CN Flag, paper sensing (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RM1-5270-000CN Solenoid assembly, IN (MBM) Covers (MBM) on page 469 RM1-5270-000CN Solenoid assembly, IN (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 RM1-5461-000CN Plate, ground assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-6672-000CN Bin assembly (MBM) Main body (MBM; 1 of 2) on page 471 RM1-8285-000CN Motor, paper feed assembly (M101) Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8289-000CN Control-panel assembly (M602 and M603) Covers on page 411 RM1-8290-000CN Control-panel assembly (M601) Covers on page 411 RM1-8293-000CN PCA, DC controller Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8293-000CN PCA, DC controller PCAs (product base) on page 435 RM1-8294-000CN PCA, inner connecting Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8294-000CN PCA, inner connecting PCAs (product base) on page 435 RM1-8298-000CN Cable, feed sensor Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8302-000CN PCA, Feeder (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-8302-000CN PCA, feeder (1x500) PCA (1x500) on page 443 RM1-8303-000CN PCA, feeder (1x1500) PCA (1x1500) on page 455 RM1-8305-000CN PCA (duplexer) PCA (duplexer) on page 459 RM1-8307-000CN Switch, interlock assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-8308-000CN Cable, drum motor Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-8311-000CN Cable, feed motor Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8340-000CN Cable, laser Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8341-000CN Cable, panel Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8344-000CN Cable, door switch Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8348-000CN Connector, inlet High-voltage power supply on page 419 RM1-8350-000CN PCA (MBM) PCA (MBM) on page 475 RM1-8351-000CN PCA (S/S) PCA (S and S/S) on page 491 RM1-8352-000CN PCA (S) PCA (S and S/S) on page 491 RM1-8358-000CN Motor, drum assembly (M102) Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-8388-000CN Face-up tray assembly Covers on page 411 RM1-8392-000CN High-voltage power supply 110V High-voltage power supply on page 419 RM1-8392-000CN Power supply, high-voltage 110V PCAs (product base) on page 435 RM1-8393-000CN High-voltage power supply 220V High-voltage power supply on page 419 RM1-8393-000CN Power supply, low-voltage 220V PCAs (product base) on page 435 RM1-8394-000CN Cover, top assembly (M602 and M603) Covers on page 411 RM1-8395-000CN Fuser assembly 110V Fuser assembly on page 433 RM1-8396-000CN Fuser assembly 220V Fuser assembly on page 433 RM1-8399-000CN Cover, duplexing assembly Covers on page 411 RM1-8400-000CN Cover, right (M602 and M603) Covers on page 411 RM1-8401-000CN Cover, left assembly Covers on page 411 RM1-8406-000CN Laser/scanner assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8408-000CN Cover, front assembly Covers on page 411 RM1-8410-000CN Paper delivery drive assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 Numerical parts list 507 Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) 508 Part number Description Table and page RM1-8411-000CN Paper feed roller assembly Paper feed roller assembly on page 425 RM1-8413-0000CN Registration assembly Registration assembly on page 427 RM1-8414-000CN Paper delivery assembly Paper delivery assembly on page 431 RM1-8415-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8424-000CN Paper feed shaft assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8425-000CN Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly Tray 1 (MP) pickup assembly on page 429 RM1-8427-000CN Guide, front right assembly Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RM1-8428-000CN PCA, switch assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-8429-000CN USB PCA Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8434-000CN Cover, top assembly (M601) Covers on page 411 RM1-8438-000CN Sensor, temperature assembly Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8439-000CN Guide assembly, left Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-8441-000CN Plate, pickup drive side assembly (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 RM1-8445-000CN Cover, right (M601) Covers on page 411 RM1-8453-000CN Lifter drive assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 RM1-8456-000CN Paper detect sensor assembly (1x1500) Paper pickup assembly (1x500) on page 453 RM1-8457-000CN Paper pickup drive assembly (1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 RM1-8489-000CN Drum drive assembly Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-8491-000CN Transfer roller Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 RM1-8927-000CN Cable, full sensor Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 RM1-9030-000CN PCA (envelope feeder) PCA (envelope feeder) on page 467 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 4-47 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RU5-0040-000CN Gear, 23T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RU5-0088-000CN Gear, 18T Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 RU6-2105-000CN Spring, grounding Paper delivery assembly on page 431 VS1-7500-006CN Connector, drawer 6P (1x500) Main body (1x500) on page 439 VS1-7500-006CN Connector, drawer 6 pin(1x1500) Main body (1x500; 1 of 2) on page 449 VS1-7500-008CN Connector 8P (MBM) Covers (MBM) on page 469 VS1-7500-008CN Connector 8P (S and S/S) Covers (S and S/S) on page 477 VS1-7514-006CN Connector, drawer 6P High-voltage power supply on page 419 WC2-5637-000CN Switch, push Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 WG8-5624-000CN Photo interrupter (envelope feeder) Main body (1 of 2; envelope feeder) on page 463 WG8-5645-000CN Photo interrupter (S/S) Stapler/Stacker middle assembly (2 of 2; S/S) on page 485 WG8-5849-000CN Photo interrupter, IC Internal components (3 of 3) on page 417 WG8-5849-000CN Photo interrupter (duplexer) Main body (duplexer) on page 457 XA9-1503-000CN Screw, tap, M3x6 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 XA9-1671-000CN Screw, D, M3x8 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 XB4-7300-809CN Screw, tap, binding head, M3x8 Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 XB4-7401-607CN Screw, tapping pan head M4X10 Internal components (1 of 3) on page 413 XD9-0232-000CN Ring, E Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 XD9-0233-010CN Ring, E Internal components (2 of 3) on page 415 Numerical parts list 509 510 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW A ENWW Service and support ● Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement ● Data stored on the print cartridge ● End User License Agreement ● Customer self-repair warranty service ● Customer support ● Repack the product 511 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet 600 M601n, M601dn, M602n, M602dn, M602x, M603n, M603dn, M603xh One-year return-to-bench repair warranty HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province. HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 512 Appendix A Service and support ENWW THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 513 HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 514 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Data stored on the print cartridge The HP print cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product. In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might include the following: the date when the print cartridge was first installed, the date when the print cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the print cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs. The data collected from the print cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the print cartridge or their product. HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from print cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this print cartridge might have access to this data, as well. Any third party possessing the print cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip. If you prefer to not allow access to this information, you can render the chip inoperable. However, after you render the memory chip inoperable, the memory chip cannot be used in an HP product. ENWW Data stored on the print cartridge 515 End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and (b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”). RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT. 1. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as “license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code (such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code. 2. LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: 3. 516 a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product (for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use. You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software. b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes. UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement (collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail. Appendix A Service and support ENWW 4. TRANSFER. a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media, User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated. b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA. 5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software. 6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law. 7. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services. 8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. 9. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws. 10. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation. 11. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. ENWW End User License Agreement 517 © 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 04/09 518 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product. Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 519 Customer support Get telephone support for your country/region Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. 520 Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/lj600Series Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer www.hp.com/go/macosx Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information www.hp.com/go/lj600Series_software Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack Register your product www.register.hp.com Appendix A Service and support ENWW Repack the product If HP Customer Care determines that your product needs to be returned to HP for repair, follow these steps to repack the product before shipping it. CAUTION: Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing is the customer’s responsibility. 1. Remove and retain any DIMM cards that you have purchased and installed in the product. CAUTION: Static electricity can damage electronic parts. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the product. 2. Remove and retain the print cartridge. CAUTION: It is extremely important to remove the print cartridge before shipping the product. A print cartridge that remains in the product during shipping can leak and cover the product engine and other parts with toner. To prevent damage to the print cartridge, avoid touching the roller on it, and store the print cartridge in its original packing material or so that it is not exposed to light. ENWW 3. Remove and retain the power cable, interface cable, and optional accessories. 4. If possible, include print samples and 50 to 100 sheets of paper or other print media that did not print correctly. 5. In the U.S., call HP Customer Care to request new packing material. In other areas, use the original packing material, if possible. Hewlett-Packard recommends insuring the equipment for shipment. Repack the product 521 522 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B ENWW Product specifications ● Physical specifications ● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ● Operating environment 523 Physical specifications Table B-1 Product dimensions and weights Product model Height Depth Width Weight n and dn models 394 mm (15.5 in) 4515 mm (17.8 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 23.6 kg (51.9 lb) x and xh models 514 mm (20.25 in) 451 mm (17.8 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) 30.4 kg (66.8 lb) Optional 500-sheet feeder 121 mm (4.8 in) 448.4 mm (17.7 in) 415 mm (16.3 in) 6.7 kg (14.7 lb) Optional 1500-sheet tray 263.5 mm (10.4 in) 511.5 mm (20.1 in) 421 mm (16.6 in) 13 kg (28.7 lb) Optional duplexing unit 154 mm (6.1 in) 348 mm (13.7 in) 332 mm (13.1 in) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Optional envelope feeder 113 mm (4.4 in) 354 mm (13.9 in) 328 mm (12.9 in) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) Optional stapler/stacker 371 mm (14.6 in) 430 mm (16.9 in) 387 mm (15.2 in) 4.2 kg (9.3 lb) Optional stacker 304 mm (12 in) 430 mm (16.9 in) 378 mm (14.9 in) 3.2 kg (7.1 lb) Optional multi-bin mailbox 522 mm (20.6 in) 306 mm (12 in) 353 mm (13.9 in) 7.0 kg (15.4 lb) Optional printer stand 114 mm (4.5 in) 653 mm (25.7 in) 663 mm (26.17 in) 13.6 kg (30 lb) Table B-2 Product dimensions with all doors and trays fully opened Product model Height Depth Width n and dn models 394 mm (15.5 in) 864 mm (34.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) x and xh models 514 mm (20.25 in) 864 mm (34.0 in) 425 mm (16.75 in) Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions See www.hp.com/go/lj600Series_regulatory for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty. 524 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW Operating environment Table B-3 Necessary conditions Environmental condition Printing Storage/standby Temperature (product and print cartridge) 7.5°C (45.5°F) 0°C (32°F) to to 32.5°C (90.5°F) 35°C (95°F) 5% to 90% 35% to 85% Relative humidity ENWW Operating environment 525 526 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW C ENWW Regulatory information ● FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of Conformity ● Certificate of Volatility ● Safety statements 527 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. 528 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment. Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3). Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR® logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products: Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge. Paper use This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 529 HP LaserJet print supplies It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges after use—free of charge—with HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible! NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/ recycle. Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below. Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) 1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag. 2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg (70 lb). 3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. OR 1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges). 2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. Single returns 1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box. 2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box. Shipping For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during 530 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged print cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/ store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice. Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii. Non-U.S. returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies. Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury. This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following: HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer ENWW Type Carbon monofluoride lithium Weight 1.5 g Location On formatter board User-removable No Environmental product stewardship program 531 For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/ community/environment/productinfo/safety. For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics: 532 ● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products ● HP’s commitment to the environment ● HP’s environmental management system Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 533 Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard DoC#: BOISB-1101-00-rel.1.0 Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Including: CE998A – 500-sheet paper tray CF062A – Duplexer Regulatory Model Number2) BOISB-1101-00 Product Options: ALL Print Cartridges: CE390A, CE390X conforms to the following Product Specifications: SAFETY: IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1: 2006 +A11 IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) IEC 62311:2007 / EN62311:2008 GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR22:2005 +A1/ EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A1), 3) EN 61000-3-2:2006 EN 61000-3-3:2008 EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A1)/ ICES-003, Issue 4 GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and carries the CE-Marking 534 accordingly. Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2. For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s). 3. The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures”. Boise, Idaho USA September 2011 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQTRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.eu/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000) ENWW Declaration of Conformity 535 Certificate of Volatility This is a statement regarding the volatility of customer data stored in memory. This statement describes how to securely erase data from the product. Types of memory Volatile memory The product utilizes volatile memory (a total of 512 MB; expandable to 1024 MB) to support the embedded OS and to store customer data during the printing process. When the product is powered off, this volatile memory is erased. Non-volatile memory The product utilizes non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to store system control data and user preference settings. No customer print data is stored in non-volatile memory. This non-volatile memory can be cleared and restored to factory defaults by performing a Cold Reset or Restore Factory Settings at the control panel. Hard-disk-drive memory The product contains an internal hard disk drive that may retain data after the product is powered off. The product also may contain additional optional compact flash storage. Data stored in these devices may be from stored copy or print jobs, or third-party solutions. Some of this data can be erased from the product control panel, but most must be erased using the Secure Disk Erase feature available from the product BIOS Menu, the Embedded Web Server (EWS) for the product, and from HP Web Jetadmin. Secure Storage Erase features comply with U.S. NIST Special Publication 800-88 “Guidelines for Media Sanitization”. 536 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements. « Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord instructions Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz. Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product. Power cord statement (Japan) ENWW Safety statements 537 EMC statement (China) EMC statement (Korea) EMI statement (Taiwan) Product Stability Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time. Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet 600 M601n, M601dn, M602n, M602dn, M602x, M603n, M603dn, M603xh, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. 538 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW HUOLTO HP LaserJet 600 M601n, M601dn, M602n, M602dn, M602x, M603n, M603dn, M603xh kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser. GS statement (Germany) Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden. ENWW Safety statements 539 Substances Table (China) Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur 540 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 1,500-sheet paper deck door, removing 172 driver PCA, removing 176 left-side cover, removing 169 lift-drive assembly, removing 178 motor, removing 174 rear cover, removing 167 right-side cover, removing 168 separation roller, removing 165 1,500-sheet tray paper jams 357 500-sheet tray paper jams 356 A accessories ordering 402 acoustic specifications 524 Administration menu, control panel 250 after-service checklist 63 B Backup/Restore menu, control panel 264 batteries included 531 bins, output jams, clearing 363 removing rear 87 blank pages troubleshooting 389 blurred print, problem-solving 387 ENWW C cable, USB troubleshooting 389 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control panel 264 Canadian DOC regulations 537 cartridge ordering 402 part number 402 cartridges error messages 338 recycling 530 replace message 338 warranty 514 cartridges, print paper jams 373 replacing 64 cautions iii characters, misformed 383 checklists after-service 63 preservice 63 circuit diagram 235 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 242, 388 cleaning product 388 clearing jams 1,500-sheet tray 357 500-sheet tray 356 duplexer 359 envelope feeder 361 fuser area 369 output area 363 staple 365 top-cover 373 Tray 1 356 configuration page 199 configuration pages printing 243 connectivity solving problems 390 connectors locating 229 control panel Administration menu 250 Backup/Restore menu 264 blank, troubleshooting 196 Calibrate/Cleaning menu 264 Display Settings menu 255 General Settings menu 250 Manage Supplies menu 256 Manage Trays menu 257 messages, troubleshooting 266 Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu 258 Network Settings menu 259 Print Settings menu 253 Reports menu 250 Service menu 265 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu 258 Troubleshooting menu 263 USB Firmware Upgrade menu 265 control panel menus retrieve job 247 conventions, document iii cooling fan FN101, replacing 142 cooling fan FN102, replacing 117 cooling fan FN103, replacing 119 cooling fan FN301, replacing 144 Index 541 counts 391 page, reset 391 reset after replacing formatter 391 See also pages counts covers 1,500-sheet paper deck, removing 167 envelope accessory, removing 89 formatter, removing 71 front, removing 105 left-side, removing 98 removing 88 right-side, removing 95 top, removing 92 covers, product base diagrams and part numbers 410 creased paper, problem-solving 385 crooked pages 384 curled paper, problem-solving 384 customer support online 520 repacking product 521 D date manufacture 245 DC controller PCA, locating 229 removing 128 defects examples of 380 repeating 246 demo page 199 density problem-solving 380 determine the problem source 193 diagnostics engine 204 LED 199 diagrams covers, product base 410 dimensions, product 524 DIMMs memory 80 542 Index Display Settings menu, control panel 255 disposal, end-of-life 531 document conventions iii dots, problem-solving 381, 386 dropouts, problem-solving 381 drum drive, removing 139 drum drive, replacing 139 duplex printing accessory jams 359 E electrical specifications 524 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 60 end-of-life disposal 531 engine diagnostics 204 envelope accessory, front covers, removing 89 envelope feeder paper jams 361 envelopes wrinkled, problem-solving 385 environment for product specifications 525 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 529 error messages, control panel 266 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 60 European Union, waste disposal 532 event log 199 clear 352 print 351 view 352 event-log messages 350 F fan FN101, removing 142 fan FN102, removing 117 fan FN103, removing 119 fan FN301, removing 144 fans troubleshooting 196 fasteners, types of 62 FCC regulations 528 feed and pickup rollers, replacing Tray 1 82 feed rollers, replacing tray 2 66 Finnish laser safety statement 538 firmware version information 245 firmware, downloading new 397 flowcharts troubleshooting 194 formatter resets after replacing 391 formatter cage, removing 71 formatter cover, removing 71 formatter lights 199 formatter, removing 71 front cover, removing 105 fuser paper jams 369 part number 403 replacing 70 fuser motor, removing 137 fuser motor, replacing 137 G General Settings menu, control panel 250 gray background, problemsolving 382 H hard drive remove 74 heartbeat LED 200 HP Customer Care 520 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 245 lights 199 humidity specifications 525 I image quality print, troubleshooting 380 image repetition, problem-solving 387 inner connecting PCA removing 114 installation verify for optional accessories 243 IPv4 information 245 IPv6 information 245 ENWW J jams 1,500-sheet tray 357 500-sheet tray 356 causes of 376 common causes of 355 diagnostic test for 206 duplexer 359 envelope feeder 361 fuser area 369 output bin 363 recovery 375 staple 365 top-cover 373 Tray 1 356 Japanese VCCI statement 537 Jetdirect print server lights 199 K Korean EMC statement 538 L laser safety statements 537, 538 laser/scanner removing 158 LEDs. See lights left-side cover, removing 98 license, software 516 light print problem-solving 380 lights formatter 199 troubleshooting with 199 lines, problem-solving 381, 385, 386 loose toner, problem-solving 382 M Macintosh support 520 main assemblies locating 224 removing 107 Manage Supplies menu, control panel 256 Manage Trays menu, control panel 257 manual print modes 378 material restrictions 531 ENWW Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 532 memory information 243 supply errors 267 memory chip, print cartridge description 515 menus, control panel Administration 250 Backup/Restore 264 Calibrate/Cleaning 264 Display Settings 255 General Settings 250 Manage Supplies 256 Manage Trays 257 Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings 258 Network Settings 259 Print Settings 253 Reports 250 Service 265 Stapler/Stacker Settings 258 Troubleshooting 263 USB Firmware Upgrade 265 menus, control-panel retrieve job 247 mercury-free product 531 messages, control panel 266 misformed characters, problemsolving 383 model number 245 motors troubleshooting 196 Multi-Bin Mailbox Settings menu, control panel 258 N Network Settings menu, control panel 259 networks HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 245 notes iii O online support 520 operating environment specifications 525 ordering print cartridge 402 product documents 405 supplies and accessories 402 output bins paper jams 363 removing rear 87 output quality defect examples 380 print, troubleshooting 380 repeating defects 246 P packaging product 521 pages blank 389 not printing 389 printing slowly 389 pages count 391 reset 391 See also counts paper curled 384 jams 376 skewed 384 wrinkled 385 paper jams 1,500-sheet tray 357 500-sheet tray 356 duplexer 359 envelope feeder 361 fuser area 369 output bin 363 top-cover 373 Tray 1 356 paper path diagnostic test 206 paper pickup problems solving 376 paper-delivery assembly removing 161 part number print cartridge 402 part numbers covers, product base 410 parts replacing 406 password Service menu PIN 391 PCA, inner connecting remove 114 physical specifications 524 Index 543 pickup and feed rollers, replacing Tray 1 82 pickup rollers, replacing tray 2 66 pickup-drive assembly removing 131 pliers, required 61 port configuration information 245 post-service tests 63 power consumption 524 troubleshooting 196 power supply, high voltage removing 148 pre-troubleshooting checklist 193 preservice checklist 63 print cartridge ordering 402 part number 402 print cartridges error messages 338 memory chips 515 paper jams 373 recycling 530 replace message 338 replacing 64 warranty 514 print quality blurred 387 built-in troubleshooting pages 241 defect examples 380 dropouts 381 gray background 382 light print 380 lines 381 loose toner 382 manual print modes 378 misformed characters 383 repeating defects 246, 383 repetitive images 387 scattered lines 386 smeared toner 382 specks 381 test 63 test pages 241 tire tracks 385 troubleshooting 380 544 Index white lines 385 white spots 386 Print Quality menu options 378 Print Settings menu, control panel 253 printing modes, manual 378 troubleshooting 389 problem source determine 193 problem-solving blurred print 387 curled paper 384 dropouts 381 event-log messages 350 gray background 382 light print 380 lines 381, 385 repeating defects 383 repetitive images 387 scattered lines 386 skewed pages 384 smeared toner 382 specks 381 text quality 383, 387 tire tracks 385 white spots 386 wrinkled paper 385 Q quality defect examples 380 print, troubleshooting 380 repeating defects 246 R rear output bin paper jams 363 removing 87 recycling 530 HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 530 registration assembly removing 107 regulatory statements environmental product stewardship program 529 removing parts cautions for 60 checklists 63 tools, required 61 repacking product 521 repeating defects 246 repeating defects, problemsolving 383, 387 replace supplies message 338 replacing parts 60 Reports menu, control panel 250 retrieve job menu 247 right-side cover removing 95 rollers locating 224 repetitive defects 246 transfer, replacing 69 Tray 1 pickup and feed, replacing 82 tray 2 separation, pickup, and feed, replacing 66 S safety statements 537, 538 screwdrivers, required 61 screws replacing 60 screws, types of 62 security settings information 245 sensor tests manual 0utput bin full sensor (PS104) 215 fuser delivery sensor (PS700) 212 media width sensors 1/2 (PS106/108) 214 PF/PD media path sensors (PS1603/1603/1603/1704 ) 211 pre-feed sensor (PS102) 211 top of page sensor (PS103) 210 Tray 1 paper present sensor (PS105) 216 tray 2 paper present sensor (PS101) 217 tray 2 paper size switches (SW102) 219 tray 2 top of stack sensor (PS107) 218 ENWW sensors tests, manual 208 tests, manual tray/bin 220 separation roller replacing 85 separation rollers, replacing tray 2 66 service repacking product 521 tools, required 61 Service menu options 391 Service menu, control panel 265 shipping product 521 skewed pages 384 smeared toner, problem-solving 382 software software license agreement 516 solve problems 181 solving direct-connect problems 390 network problems 390 specifications electrical and acoustic 524 operating environment 525 physical 524 specks, problem-solving 381, 386 spots, problem-solving 381, 386 stacker and stapler/stacker parts lists and diagrams 476 staple jams 365 stapler/stacker jams, staple 365 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu, control panel 258 static precautions 60 status page 199 supplies error messages 338 memory errors 267 ordering 402 recycling 530 replace message 338 support online 520 repacking product 521 ENWW T Taiwan EMI statement 538 TCP/IP information 245 technical support online 520 repacking product 521 temperature specifications 525 tests manual sensor 208 paper path 206 post-service 63 print-quality 63 tray/bin manual sensor 220 text, problem-solving blurred 387 misformed characters 383 timing chart 234 tips iii tire tracks, problem-solving 385 toner output quality, problemsolving 382 toner cartridges. See print cartridges tools, required 61 top cover paper jams, clearing 373 top cover, removing 92 top output bin paper jams 363 transfer roller replacing 69 Tray 1 paper jams 356 pickup and feed rollers, replacing 82 tray 1 paper-pickup assembly, removing 155 separation roller, replacing 85 tray 2 extension door, removing 91 separation, pickup, and feed rollers, replacing 66 Tray 3 physical specifications 524 trays paper jams 356, 357 troubleshooting 181 1,500-sheet tray paper jams 357 500-sheet tray paper jams 356 about 193 blank pages 389 checklist 182, 193 clean the paper path 242, 388 configuration page 199 configuration pages for 243 control panel messages 266 demo page 199 direct-connect problems 390 duplexer jams 359 envelope feeder jams 361 event log 199 flowchart 194 fuser-area paper jams 369 jams 376 lights, using 199 network problems 390 output bin jams 363 pages not printing 389 pages printing slowly 389 paper feed problems 376 power-on 196 print quality 380 problem source 193 repeating defects 246 reports and tools 199 staple jams 365 status page 199 top-cover paper jams 373 Tray 1 paper jams 356 USB cables 389 Troubleshooting menu, control panel 263 U updates, downloading product 397 USB Firmware Upgrade menu, control panel 265 USB port troubleshooting 389 V version, hardware firmware 245 Index 545 W warnings iii warranty customer self repair 519 license 516 print cartridges 514 product 512 wavy paper, problem-solving 384 Web sites customer support 520 Macintosh customer support 520 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 532 weight, product 524 white lines or spots, problemsolving 385 wrinkled paper, problem-solving 385 546 Index ENWW © 2011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CE988-90945* *CE988-90945* CE988-90945
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Modify Date : 2011:06:09 09:39:22-06:00 Create Date : 2011:06:09 09:30:07-06:00 Metadata Date : 2011:06:09 09:39:22-06:00 Format : application/pdf Title : HP LaserJet Enterprise 600 M601, M602, and M603 Series Printer Service Manual - ENWW Creator : HP LaserJet Information Engineering Subject : Edition 1, 11/2011 Document ID : uuid:bf56f61f-1ca5-44fa-ae77-2c4fd5dc71b5 Instance ID : uuid:12f192d2-2f6c-4780-afeb-450efc1b57fa Keywords : Edition 1, 11/2011 Has XFA : No Page Count : 572 Page Layout : SinglePage Author : HP LaserJet Information EngineeringEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools